Great British Bucket List

10 Day England Itinerary: The Best Sights And Attractions In England

This 10-day england itinerary takes you on a tour of the most famous sights in the country, plus a few hidden gems.

england itinerary 10 days

If you’re planning a trip to the United Kingdom, it’s hard to know where to start. The first big decision is do you fancy spending all of your time in England, or perhaps venture to Wales or Scotland too? While Britain isn’t a huge island (you could drive from Land’s End in the south to John O’Groats in the north in under 15 hours) the scenery is varied and you’ll want to take your time.

If it’s your first visit, I’d recommend focusing on England, and spending at least a week travelling around. You can move at a fast pace and visit a new place each day, but if you fancy a more leisurely trip, you’ll probably want to allow a minimum of 2 days in some of them, especially when you factor in the travel time.

Houses of Parliament, London

Coming up is a 10-day England itinerary packed full of the best sights in the country. I’ll admit it’s been really difficult to choose where to include. There are SO many other places that are equally as beautiful, but this route gives you a nice variety.

From London’s museums and iconic landmarks, to the epic beauty of Dorset’s Jurassic Coast, Bath’s history and the landscapes of the Lake District, this itinerary has it all! If you want to wander through streets that could feature in Harry Potter or soak up the romance of where The Holiday was filmed, there are some iconic movie locations on this route too.

Tintagel, Cornwall

The easiest way to travel around England is by car. It’ll give you the flexibility to get off the beaten track, visit some unique destinations and pack as much into your trip as your time allows. However, if you’d rather use public transport, all of these locations are accessible by trains or buses too.

10-Day England Itinerary: The Best Sights And Attractions In England

2 days in london.

There’s SO much to see in the UK’s capital, you could easily spend a week exploring the city. For this 10-day England itinerary I’ve suggested you spend 2 days in London and pack in as much sightseeing as you can.

If it’s your first time in London you can’t miss the key landmarks. Watch the changing of the guard at Buckingham Palace, see London from a different angle from one of the 32 pods on the London Eye, check the time at Big Ben, explore Westminster Abbey, wave to Nelson in Trafalgar Square, see Tower Bridge open for a tall ship, see the crown jewels sparkling inside the Tower of London and step inside St Paul’s Cathedral. It sounds like a lot, but you can see so many sights with a long walk along the River Thames.

One of the best ways of doing all of this is on a bus tour. We really like this vintage open-top bus tour which is just oh so quintessentially British. This tour has a guide explaining all the top sights.

Alternatively, another tour we love is this half-day bike tour . In 4 hours you get to ride around London taking in all the sights – it’s a really cool way of seeing London, especially on a bright sunny day.

Tower Bridge, London

If you love museums, take a trip to South Kensington and venture inside the impressive Natural History Museum and Science Museums. They both have lots of interesting interactive exhibits and are great for families.

Natural History Museum, London

For tasty food, take a wander through Borough Market or Camden Market. If you love architecture, how about a little tour of Notting Hill. The pastel coloured houses are like something out of a kid’s book. Or for a great view, walk to the top of Primrose Hill. It’s one of our favourite spots on a sunny day. 

Portobello Road, London

The easiest way to get around London is using public transport. You can either pick up an Oyster Card (a contactless travel card) or use your own contactless bank card.

1 Day In Brighton

After a great few days in London, it’s time to escape to the coast. Brighton is one of the best seaside day trips from London by train (journey takes one hour) and a gorgeous place to explore on foot.

There’s the pier which is crammed full of fun rides, amusement arcades and food outlets wafting the sickly scent of donuts through the air. There’s a mammoth pebbly beach, lined with little art galleries, gift shops and restaurants.

Brighton Beach England

For a great view of Brighton, you could take a trip on the i360 – a tourist attraction which offers great views of the area. Plus, there are some gorgeous hotels on the seafront if you want to stay overnight.

Brighton i360

One of our favourite things about Brighton is the shopping scene. The Lanes and North Laine are full of character, and are THE place to visit for independent stores, quirky cafes and restaurants. This is a great place to shop for vintage jewellery and bohemian clothing.

Brighton promenade

Once you’ve done all of that, you’ll definitely have earned some fish and chips on the beach. Just watch out for the seagulls overhead – they’re always hungry!

1 Day In Dorset

I was debating whether to recommend two days in Cornwall, or break up the journey with one day in Dorset. Needless to say, Dorset won! I visited last year for the first time and would definitely suggest you include a stop there on your 10-day England itinerary.

durdle door beach

Dorset is known for its dramatic coastline, known as the Jurassic Coast. I’d recommend the clifftop walk from Lulworth Cove to Durdle Door – England’s iconic rock arch. If you have time, you could also do the walk from Studland Bay to Old Harry Rocks. It’s another beautiful spot, with huge chalk stones standing in the water.

Old Harry Rocks, Dorset

Alternatively, if you fancy a more relaxing day you could drive to West Bay to see the enormous limestone cliffs, which show the falling sea levels from over 175 million years ago. Or enjoy the adorable English villages of Milton Abbas or Abbotsbury.

Both have main streets lined with charming thatched cottages, many decorated with pretty plants and flowers. It’s got a quaint English charm! 

Alternatively, if you’re basing yourself in London for your England itinerary, then this is an amazing 5 day tour of Dorset and Cornwall . On this tour EVERYTHING is taken care of for you, so you don’t need to worry about transport, tickets or anything else like that.

1 Day In Cornwall

Cornwall is one of my favourite parts of England. This southern region of mainland Britain is where you’ll find a spectacular rugged coastline, top surf beaches and some of the best fresh seafood in the country. It’s a walker’s paradise, and a great place for day hikes along the South West Coast Path .

Cornwall coastline

The Cornish coastline is stunning – it’s no wonder it’s one of the top places for people to go on holiday in UK. For beach time head to Fistral Beach (Newquay’s famous surf beach), Bedruthan Steps (epic rock views), Pedn Vounder (might have you fooled for the Caribbean) or Kynance Cove (with its incredible rock formation).

Kynance Cove, Cornwall

Alternatively, you could focus on Cornwall’s food scene. There are lots of great restaurants dotted around the county, but the most famous town for gastronomy is Padstow .

Legendary chefs Rick Stein and Paul Ainsworth have launched a culinary empire in the town, and there’s a nice mix of high-end to budget friendly options. Most of them involve fresh fish and seafood brought in daily by fisherman in Padstow Harbour. Read our guide to the 13 best places to eat in Padstow before you go! 

Wild garlic soup at Paul Ainsworth At No.6, Padstow

1 Day In Bath

Bath is one of England’s prettiest cities. Most buildings here are constructed from Bath stone – a beige limestone which gives the city a certain uniformity. It’s a very walkable city, and one of my top recommendations would be to get lost in the pretty streets.

Roman Baths, Bath

There are a few highlights not to be missed. If you’re a lover of history, the city of Bath offers a lot. First time visitors must visit the Roman baths . It’s incredible to learn about the ancient ways of the Romans and their impact on modern civilisation.

For the best views, I’d recommend climbing the tower of Bath Abbey (bookable as part of a guided tour). It’s a tiring climb up, but well worth it once you see the stunning cityscapes from the top.

Alternatively, an evening cruise on the water with a glass of prosecco is a great way of seeing the city too!

View from Bath Abbey

If you’re craving relaxation after a busy few days of travelling, you could spend some time enjoying the soothing waters of Thermae Bath Spa. There are several pools, saunas and steam rooms. One pool is on a roof terrace and offers lovely views of the city too!

Thermae Bath Spa

Bath is a sophisticated city, with great places to eat and drink, lovely independent shops and plenty of history, so it’s s great addition to your 10-day England itinerary!

1 Day In The Cotswolds

The Cotswolds is one of the most picturesque regions of England. If you’ve grown up watching films set in cute English villages, you can bet 99% of the time they were filmed in this area! You know, the beautiful snowy Christmas scenes in The Holiday and Bridget Jones? Yep, they were filmed in the Cotswolds.

Arlington Row, Bibury in the Cotswolds

If you’re only spending one day in the area as part of a bigger 10-day England itinerary, I’d recommend visiting Bibury and walking down Arlington Row. After that, head to Moreton in Marsh, Bourton on the Water, Upper and Lower Slaughter and Broadway.

Cotswolds villages

The best way to enjoy this area is on a little road trip, stopping off at towns and villages, then having a little country walk before enjoying a traditional cream tea. There are a number of beautiful accommodation options in this area too, from adorable B&Bs to huge country manor houses.

Alternatively, if you want everything taken care of for you, then this is one of the most popular tours of the Cotswolds from London . It is packed full of all the top things to do in the area, and it’s one of the most recommended Cotswold tours out there!

2 Days In The Lake District

After spending time in The Cotswolds, it’s time to head north. It’s a long journey, so it might be best to add in a travel day at this point if possible.

The Lake District is England’s largest national park and covers 912 square miles. It’s stunningly beautiful, with rolling hills, pretty lakes and some of the best restaurants in the country.

Views from Honister

With just two days in the area, we’d recommend a mix of hiking, water activities and good food. There are lots of Michelin starred restaurants in the Lake District , so you could treat yourselves to an extra special meal. Our favourite was Cottage in the Wood, but there are a few others including Simon Rogan’s L’Enclume that we’d love to visit one day!

L'Enclume Restaurant

In terms of hiking, one of our favourite routes is up to Cat Bells. The views from up there are absolutely incredible. We also really enjoyed the hike from Pooley Bridge to Aira Force waterfall . The route passes high over the hills, with epic views of Ullswater from the top.

Cat Bells, Lake District

If you like getting out on the water, then there are plenty of opportunities in this area. You could kayak, hire a sailing boat, try stand up paddle boarding, go canyoning or enjoy a leisurely journey on board the historic Ullswater Steamer.

Another fantastic Great British tour is of 10 lakes in the Lake District . Here you get to hop from each lake seeing which one is your favourite – it’s a

1 Day In Cambridge

You’ve made it to the final day of your 10-day England itinerary, and it’s time for a trip to Cambridge. History lovers will adore walking the grounds of famous university colleges here. The architecture is amazing and feels very grand. The city centre has plenty of shops, restaurants and cafes to enjoy too.

punting tours in cambridge

One of the top things to do in Cambridge is go punting . It’s not an activity that goes on in other cities really – Cambridge is THE place for it. There’s nothing quite like gliding down the River Cam learning all about the history of Cambridge while on a punting tour.

punt tour cambridge

As you relax on board the boat you get to see some of the sights that are tricky to view properly from the banks of the river, including the spectacular Bridge of Sighs, the Mathematical Bridge and the back of King’s College.

As another thing to do, it’s really popular to take a tour of the colleges too for that real Cambridge university experience.

It’s a beautiful city to explore, and a great place to round off an exciting and varied 10 days in England.

Fancy going further afield? Head to Scotland and visit Edinburgh Castle, the Royal Mile or venture out into the stunning Scottish Highlands.

Alternatively, you could cross the border into Wales and visit Snowdonia or the Gower Coast. There’s so much to see in Britain – who knows where you’ll end up!

Enjoyed this 10-day England itinerary? Pin it for later…

10 Day England Itinerary

Wanderers of the World

UK Trip Itinerary: Travel Around the UK in 10 Days

We’ve both lived in the UK for pretty much our whole lives and there’s a very good reason why we’ve stayed all these years. It’s because it’s such a beautiful country!

Over the years, we’ve seen nearly every corner of the UK together and now we’re here to share this UK trip itinerary with you.

In order to see more than just London, we’d recommend you travel around the UK in 10 days or longer by car. This itinerary will focus on some incredible places you should make an effort to see during your road trip .

Are you ready? Let’s go!

Days 1 & 2: London

No trip to the UK would be complete without a visit to the capital, London. Plus, the chances are very high that this is the city you’re going to be flying in to.

Although you could easily spend the full ten days of this itinerary wandering around London and still not see it all, we’re on a mission to prove that there’s a whole country to explore outside of the capital city, so we recommend you spend your first 48 hours in London, followed by a fun UK road trip.

If it’s your first visit to London, you should make an effort to see all the top spots and attractions such as Buckingham Palace , the Houses of Parliament , Westminster Abbey , Tower Bridge , the Tower of London , the London Eye and Trafalgar Square , as well as popular shopping districts, Oxford Street , Regent Street , Camden Market and Portobello Road Market , all of which look stunning at Christmas time .

READ MORE:  17 FAMOUS STREETS IN LONDON YOU MUST SEE!

For those of you who have already seen all of these top spots, you can start venturing off the beaten path a little bit in order to see places like the pretty Mews Streets , Sky Garden , Belgravia (including the Peggy Porschen cafe ), the Prime Meridian Line , Holland Park , Little Venice , Mayfield Lavender Field , the Cutter & Squidge tea room , and loads more.

For lots more off the beaten path places to visit in London, you should definitely make it your mission to read Pretty City London: Discovering London’s Beautiful Places by Siobhan Ferguson.

It’s full of inspiration and run by the same woman behind the hugely successful Pretty City London and The Pretty Cities Instagram accounts. Get the book here >>>

Discover even more recommendations (from a London local) in this blog post! >>>

Day 3: Oxford

Taking less than 90 minutes to drive to Oxford, a truly iconic UK city , this is usually a popular day trip idea from London.

In this particular itinerary, it serves as the perfect halfway point between London and the South West, plus it’s a beautiful city so rightly deserves its place among the best here.

You can easily see the best of Oxford within one day, such as the Radcliffe Camera , Oxford Castle , Bridge of Sighs , University of Oxford Botanic Garden , Port Meadow , and a long walk along the canal before making your way across to the Cotswolds area for the next few days of this itinerary.

Day 4: Cheltenham

Found in the north of the Cotswolds, Cheltenham is one of the most historic towns in the UK as it’s the most complete Regency town .

Cheltenham was once the place to be in the 18th century after its spa waters were discovered and commercialised. Wealthy Londoners saw it as the perfect place to escape the hustle and bustle (and smog!) of the capital.

Nowadays, the stunning stucco facades and ripe history are blended with the modern including a newly established street art scene.

As Cheltenham is quite a small town, you only need to spend one day here in order to see the best of it, including the town’s many beautiful parks and gardens , Pittville Pump Room , historic Regency architecture and the Promenade .

For more fun things to do in Cheltenham, take a look at this blog post >>>

Day 5: The Cotswolds

Thatched-roof cottages, rolling green hills, stone buildings and farmlands evoke the ultimate vision of the quintessential English countryside.

And often, it’s the villages found in the stunning Cotswolds that evoke these thoughts and inspire travellers to visit the UK, which is why there should be no surprise for the Cotswolds to make it onto this UK trip itinerary.

It’s recommended that you spend a full day exploring some of the best Cotswolds villages such as Bourton-on-the-Water , Chipping Campden and Stow-on-the-Wold , which are all fairly close to one another, oh so beautiful and just what you imagine when thinking of a Cotswold village.

Read more about these Cotswolds villages and what to see and do in each one here >>>

Day 6: Bristol

Considered to be one of the most fun, vibrant and relaxed cities in the UK, there are lots of very good reasons why you should make an effort to see Bristol during your trip.

It’s a fairly small city so is really walkable, and offers so much beauty, intrigue, colour and fun along the way.

Some of the city’s most iconic landmarks include the Clifton Suspension Bridge , SS Great Britain , the Matthew , the Harbourside and the old part of the city centre, while there’s also plenty of more unusual places to visit for those of you after something a little more unique during your trip as well.

For more Bristol inspiration, take a look at our one day in Bristol itinerary >>> Or check out all of our Bristol blogs here >>>

Day 7: Brecon Beacons

Four Waterfalls Walk - Falls of Snow

While you’re in this neck of the woods, it makes sense to see some of the Brecon Beacons in Wales… especially if you’re an outdoors adventure lover like us.

The Brecon Beacons are an iconic image when thinking about the UK and easily one of the most beautiful places owned by the National Trust .

There are so many different kinds of walk you can take – from hiking across the grassy plains , to walking behind waterfalls , to rambling near reservoirs .

In order to see all of the best parts of the Brecon Beacons, it would easily take you the full ten days of this itinerary. So with only one day devoted to it, your best bet would be to drive through some of it and do an easy day hike as well.

Two of our favourite walks (ever) have been in the Brecon Beacons.

The first is the Four Waterfalls Walk near Ystradfellte , which involves woodland walks and the opportunity to walk behind a large waterfall (for free)! This is a lot of fun … and very wet, obviously!

Our second favourite walk in the Brecon Beacons is around Pontsticill Reservoir .

The water is a stunning shade of blue, and there are little secluded areas by the waters edge, perfect for picnicking in. You can also walk across the bridge in the middle of the reservoir to get perfect 360 degree views of the reservoir.

Good luck picking just one of these walks to do!

For more Brecon Beacons inspiration, check out our hiking guides:

  • Pontsticill Reservoir
  • Four Waterfalls Walk

Day 8: Bath

Views of Bath and Pulteney Bridge

With the whole city declared a World Heritage Site in 1987 and depicting the very essence of English idyll, Bath is one of our most favourite of European cities.

The entire vibe is like something out of a Jane Austen novel. From the Bath buildings, to the stunning abbey, to the Ancient Roman baths, this entire city is a cultural and historical wonder.

As a walkable city, it’s easy to see the highlights of Bath in just one day (without rushing). Some of the top attractions to see are the Roman Baths , Bath Abbey , Royal Crescent , The Jane Austen Centre , Assembly Rooms , as well as The Botanical Gardens in Victoria Park.

To find out how to spend a perfect one day in Bath, click here >>>

Day 9: Stonehenge & Salisbury

Stonehenge in Wiltshire

Stonehenge is possibly one of the most iconic landmarks in all of the UK.

Thought to have been constructed from 3000 BC to 2000 BC, archaeologists believe it could have once been a burial ground.

T oday, it’s a marvel to walk around as you wonder how our Neolithic ancestors were able to construct such an incredible monument without modern machinery.

From Bath, it’ll take you just short of an hour to drive to Stonehenge, and you’d want to spend around 1-2 hours at Stonehenge itself. From there, it takes just 20 minutes to drive to Salisbury, which we highly recommend doing to make a day of it .

Salisbury is another of the UK’s historic cities, albeit a slightly less popular one with global tourists.

Inside Salisbury Cathedral , you’ll find one of four original Magna Carta documents, while the city of Salisbury offers so many other historic landmarks including a pub ( The Haunch of Venison ), which dates back as far as 700 years ago. Plus, their food is pretty damn delicious!

For more interesting things to do in Salisbury, take a look at this blog post >>>

Day 10: London

Seagull in London

Your final day is probably going to be spent making your way back to London to catch your flight.

If you’ve followed this itinerary, then you’re looking at a two hour drive from Salisbury to the centre of London.

You may want to spend a few final hours continuing to explore London (depending on what time your flight is)… for anything you didn’t have time to do during your first two days in the UK.

ALTERNATIVELY…

Popular with UK locals and tourists alike the world over, the pretty counties of Devon and Cornwall are also well worth a visit.

Montacute House, Devon, England

If you’ve got an extra few days to spend in the UK in order to make this a 2 week UK trip itinerary instead, then you should definitely take a slight detour through Devon and onto Cornwall to see places like Exmoor National Park , Dartmoor National Park , the Eden Project , the Lost Gardens of Heligan , Lands End and some of the best Cornwall beaches .

You could easily do this detour after visiting Bristol or Bath if you’re following the above itinerary.

Get some tips and inspiration in our Cornwall road trip itinerary post >>>

Alternatively, you could also skip Oxford, Cheltenham, the Cotswolds and Bristol in order to head straight to Devon and Cornwall from London if preferred. If you do this, you should set aside around 3 or 4 days to see the best of these two counties.

Is this UK itinerary not quite what you were after? We also offer custom travel planning services !

Where to Stay in the UK for this 10 Day Itinerary

As you’ll be spending a couple of days in London as part of this itinerary, it makes sense to spend your first few nights here.

Generally speaking, London can be quite expensive compared to the rest of the UK, however, you can still get a decent night’s sleep within a mid-range budget if you stay in and around North London, such as Hampstead or Islington.

Here are a few of our hotel recommendations in London:

  • Langorf Hotel : Housed within a traditional townhouse, Langorf can be found in Hampstead Borough, and has easy connections to London’s city centre via a 10 minute tube ride. The rooms are spacious with en-suites, while the communal areas are traditional, yet stylish.
  • Haverstock Hotel : Haverstock Hotel can be found a 4 minute walk from Belsize Park Tube Station, which has direct connections to the centre of London, taking just 12 minutes. The rooms are all lavishly decorated, while the communal areas are understated, yet useful.
  • Best Western Swiss Cottage Hotel : Best Western Swiss Cottage Hotel is also housed in a traditional townhouse, and is just metres away from the local tube station, which is on the Jubilee line, ensuring a trip into London’s centre takes less than 15 minutes. The rooms have all been traditionally decorated, while the communal areas look just as elegant.

The picturesque Cotswolds is a great area to stay in as it’s close to Cheltenham and Bristol, while it also only takes around 90 minutes to drive to the Brecon Beacons, making this area a perfect base for days 4 to 7 of this itinerary.

Covering over 800 square miles, the Cotswolds is a big area, so we would recommend you stay near Stroud in order to be as central as you can and close to the M5 motorway.

Here are a few of our hotel recommendations near Stroud:

  • The Bear Of Rodborough Hotel : Found just a few minutes south of Stroud, The Bear Of Rodborough is housed within a former 17th century coaching inn, which means the communal areas have plenty of character. The rooms themselves have been elegantly renovated, while maintaining as much of the inn’s character as possible.
  • Burleigh Court Hotel : Also found a few minutes south of Stroud, Burleigh Court Hotel is also steeped in history and character; this time inspired by its 18th century manor house roots. The rooms are all incredibly spacious and full of period charm.
  • Wild Garlic Bistro & Rooms : For a more modern stay near Stroud, the Wild Garlic Bistro & Rooms is a great place to stay as a couple. The restaurant beneath the rooms is superb and the rooms themselves are all clean, bright and airy.

Bath is such an important part of UK history, and ridiculously pretty, so it’s highly recommended you spend a night in Bath if you can.

Your best bet would be to stay within the city’s historic centre. You may pay a little bit more, but you’ll definitely increase your chances of staying within a stunning period property.

Here are a few of our hotel recommendations in Bath:

  • No.15 Great Pulteney : Found right in the middle of all of Bath’s action (just a 3 minute walk from the Roman Baths and Abbey), No.15 Great Pulteney is so luxurious. If you’ve ever wondered what it may have been like to live in an old Georgian manor house, then this is your chance!
  • The Gainsborough Bath Spa : Housed above a lavish spa, The Gainsborough Bath Spa is able to offer the epitome in luxury and relaxation. In fact, it’s the only UK hotel with access to naturally heated thermal waters within its Spa Village. The rooms are charming and spacious, while access to the spa is well worth the money by itself.
  • Abbey Hotel : Just two minutes from Bath Abbey, the Abbey Hotel is a large hotel, housed within a typical Georgian building. The rooms are all traditionally decorated, while the communal areas are lavish and elegant. This hotel is sure to give you a flavour of just what Bath is really about.

We hope you find this itinerary useful! Are you excited to travel around the UK for 10 days? We’d love to know what you’re most excited to see…

Don’t forget your UK packing list! Here’s what you should wear in the UK >>>

Need help planning your trip to the UK? Check out our UK travel planning guide now!

Did you like this? Why not share it around?!

UK Trip Itinerary: Travel Around the UK in 10 Days

Justine Jenkins

Justine is one half of the married couple behind the Wanderers of the World travel blog. She lives in Bristol, UK and has travelled extensively within Europe and beyond since 2013. After her trips, she shares detailed travel itineraries, helpful travel guides and inspiring blog posts about the places she's been to. When she's not travelling overseas, you'll find her joining her husband, Scott on various day trips, weekend getaways and walks within the UK, which she also writes about on Wanderers of the World. Aside from travelling and writing, she also loves reading, crafting and learning about nature.

Leave a reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

SUCH a good itinerary! Been to a couple of these places, London being a highlight since we lived there. Need to see some more of these beautiful places!

Thank you! We’re pleased to hear you like our itinerary so much! 100% agreed – there’s far too many incredible places to visit here, I hope you get to see more of them one day 🙂

You mean 10 days in England! The U.K is comprised of 4 countries, not just one.

Hi Mable, Thanks for taking the time to comment! Although this blog post does focus on England a lot, I do have to point out that we included a day in the Brecon Beacons in Wales on the seventh day, which is why we labelled this as a UK trip itinerary. I appreciate that being able to see more of the UK would be tricky in just 10 days though 🙂 Best, Justine

Why do you suggest visiting Bristol on Day 6 and Brecon Beacons Day 7? Doesn’t it make more sense inverted?

Thanks for commenting! We suggested visiting Bristol before the Brecon Beacons as we thought it would help to break up the driving on the first leg into Wales as Bristol is closer to Bath. However, we agree that you could do this part of the itinerary either way around as there isn’t that much to change up should you wish to 🙂

The World Was Here First

The Ultimate 10-Day England Itinerary: 3 Perfect Routes

Last Updated on January 3, 2024

by Maggie Turansky

Disclaimer: This article contains affiliate links. That means if you click a link and make a purchase, we may make a small commission. As an Amazon Associate we earn from qualifying purchases. For more information, see our privacy policy.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Planning the perfect England itinerary can get a bit overwhelming, especially when you’re looking at exploring the country outside of the capital. There is so much to see and do in England that you can be forgiven if you feel slightly dazed when trying to figure out how to pack everything into a short period of time. However, if you’re planning to spend 10 days in England, there are tons of options available for you that can take you all over the country.

Far too many visitors to England set their sites only on London and fail to realise all that lies elsewhere in the country, from beautiful beaches to historic towns to stunning natural vistas — England has it all.

So if you’re interested in mapping out the perfect 10-day itinerary you’ve come to the right place. We’ve lived in and travelled around England extensively and have a lot of knowledge about where to go and how long to spend in each amazing destination in this beautiful country.

Table of Contents

Getting To & Around England

The road and rail systems in England are well-developed, but it can still take some planning to figure out how you want to get around.

First and foremost, you need to figure out which airport or city you will be flying into. If you’re planning on including London on your trip to England (or even if you’re not), then it’s probably easiest to fly into the capital, however, it is worth noting that there are a total of six international airports that serve the greater London area – these include Heathrow, Gatwick, Luton, Stansted, London City and Southend.

If you are coming from any further than continental Europe, then it is likely you will only fly into Heathrow or Gatwick, located to the southeast and south of Central London respectively. Getting to central London from any of the area’s main airports is straightforward and easy, as there are many different options available.

Once you’ve figured out your plan to get to England, you need to find out how you plan to get around. As I mentioned earlier, the public transit system in the vast majority of England is incredibly well-developed and easy to navigate.

As a general rule, if you’re planning on spending a good amount of time in cities, you can plan to rely solely on the public transport system and your own two feet to get around. This holds especially true for London, but can apply to most major metropolitan areas in England.

Modern Double Decker Bus in the streets of London.

When you venture outside of the capital or other cities to enjoy the countryside and rolling hills of England, is when you may want to consider renting a car. While you don’t really need a car in the cities, having your own vehicle when exploring national parks or smaller villages is generally preferable as it can give you an infinite more amount of flexibility and control over your itinerary.

Driving in England is safe and easy, as the roads are in fantastic condition and people are generally very courteous drivers.

Keep in mind for those coming from abroad that they do drive on the left-hand side of the road in England and while this may seem daunting for those who are not used to it, it takes surprisingly little time to get the hang of it — especially if there is other traffic on the road!

If you’re planning on hiring a car while in England, we recommend booking through Rentalcars.com. This platform aggregates prices across many major car hire companies, ensuring that you get a great deal for your rental car.

It’s also worth considering taking out an excess insurance policy through a third party like iCarHireInsurance which will typically be cheaper compared to taking out the equivalent insurance through the car rental company.

If you don’t want to rent a car for your England road trip itinerary or just plan to get one for a couple of days but not for the entirety of your trip, then you’ll likely be wondering what the best way to get between cities is in England.

The rail network is going to be the most comfortable and efficient way to travel between English destinations and the system is extensive and incredibly easy to use. However, trains can be quite expensive in England if not booked far enough in advance. To avoid overpaying on a train ticket, we suggest using Omio to book your journeys well in advance.

If you want to save some money during your trip to England, then the bus is your best bet. Coaches in England are frequent and extensive and can cost a fraction of the same route on the train, however, they are not as comfortable and can be a fair bit slower depending on the route. Again, you can book coach routes online here.

The Peak District

London and Southwest Itinerary

This first itinerary for England has you exploring London and some of the most vibrant regions and cities to the west and along the coast. Though this itinerary can be done by public transport, it would be best done if you rented a car on the fourth day when leaving London.

Days 1-3: London

The best place to begin any trip to England is in its historic and vibrant capital city, London. As one of the largest cities in Europe, London is packed in the brim with cool and interesting things to see and do and there is no way that you will be able to pack it all into a mere three days , so it’s best not even to try.

Instead, concentrate your first day on the sites of central London, including Trafalgar Square, the National Gallery, Green Park, the Palaces of Westminster, Big Ben and Westminster Abbey. Take a walking tour if you want to get your bearings and get some historical context for all the sites you’re seeing.

On your second day, visit the Tower of London, gaze in awe at the Tower Bridge, walk across the ultra-modern Millennium Bridge to the Tate Modern and visit St Paul’s Cathedral and Borough Market.

And on your third day in London, visit the incredible British Museum (the Egyptian exhibit is particularly fascinating if you ask me!), before browsing the shops on Oxford Street and in Covent Garden before wandering through the eclectic and trendy SoHo neighbourhood.

For visitors who plan to visit a lot of paid attractions, buying a London Go City Pass will save you money on entrance fees.

If you’re not interested in seeing more of the city, you could opt for a day trip to countless places including Windsor Castle, Oxford, Cambridge , Bath, the Seven Sisters or even to York. You can visit these places independently via coach or train or take a day tour if you’d prefer a guide.

Though three days in London won’t really allow you to venture past the city centre and to see anything much past the main tourist sites, it can still give you an excellent feel for the city (plus plenty of this to visit when you inevitably return!)

The Big Ben, the Houses of Parliament and Westminster Bridge in London.

Where to Stay in London

Hotel Edward – A great mid-range option in Paddington, west London, this is a great place to stay if you want to be situated close to central London. They have countless great rooms available.

Sanderson Hotel – A hip luxury option in SoHo, this hotel is located only a quick dash away from Oxford Street. They have countless plush rooms on offer and a number of other amenities including a restaurant/bar, gym, spa and many others.

Astor Hyde Park Hostel – This hip hostel is perfect for budget and solo travellers in London. Located centrally close to Hyde Park, it is well situated to explore a lot of London’s top attractions, has fantastic common areas, and offers both dorm and private rooms.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more London hotels!

Days 4-5: Bristol

From London, it’s time to head west to the trendy city of Bristol. This city is often overlooked by tourists and it really is a shame — it really has so much to offer. Though you can easily visit Bristol as a day trip from London, it is worth spending a night here, especially because you can spend your first day exploring all of the amazing sites on the way to the city.

On your way to Bristol, make sure to make a number of stop-offs and detours in order to really pack a lot of the highlights of West England into a short period of time.

A short detour from the motorway to Bristol will lead you to the iconic neolithic site of Stonehenge and a bit further afield, you can visit Salisbury with its famous cathedral.

And just a bit before you hit Bristol proper, make sure to spend a good amount of time exploring the beautiful city of Bath . This historic spa town has been an important settlement since Roman times and there are lots of cool things to see and do here.

Once in Bristol, there are lots of things to see and do in order to really get to know the city, but you can pack in into one day easily, you can take a guided tour or go about independently.

Learn about Bristol’s history at the fantastic M Shed museum or learn more about its maritime history at Brunel’s SS Great Britain museum.

If you’re interested in street art, you will be delighted to hear that the famous artist Banksy got his start in Bristol and it has a thriving arts scene. Bristol also has a wonderful food and craft beer scene and it can be enjoyed while exploring the revitalised area of Wapping Wharf.

One of the most famous murals in Bristol

Where to Stay in Bristol

Victoria Square Hotel Clifton Village – A plush boutique hotel located in Bristol’s lush Clifton suburb, this is a great place to stay if you’re looking for a mid-range option in the city. They have a range of rooms available and a hearty breakfast included in the nightly price.

The Bristol Hotel – The ideal luxury hotel in Bristol, this place is located within easy walking distance of the city’s top attractions and they have a number of clean comfortable and chic rooms on offer.

The Full Moon Backpackers – An ideal option for those solo and budget travellers amongst us, this hostel is a great choice in Bristol. They have a number of dorms and private rooms available, fantastic common areas and a fantastic laid-back vibe, perfect for exploring Bristol!

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Bristol hotels!

The Clifton Suspension Bridge

Days 6-8: Cornwall

On your sixth day of this itinerary, it’s time to drive even further southwest to one of the most beautiful and sunny places in England – Cornwall!

The southwestermost region of the country, Cornwall has long been a favourite holiday destination for locals but foreign tourists rarely venture this way, and it’s incredibly hard to see why — there is so much see and do!

Cornwall is most famous for its beaches, but there is a lot more to it as well. If you’re a nature lover, there are countless walks to go on. If you want to try your hand at surfing, make sure to hit the waves in Newquay, the capital of the sport in England! History buffs will delight in the castles and ruins that dot the region as well.

One of the most famous castles is St Michael’s Mount, just outside of Penzance, which is situated on its own island accessible by a causeway that appears as low tide. If you’re a fan of Arthurian legend, then make sure to visit the dramatic ruins of Tintagel, rumoured to be the birthplace of this legendary British ruler.

St Michaels Mount in Cornwall

Spending two or three days in Cornwall is enough to really see a lot of the region and get a good feel four it, but there is always more to see if you spend more time!

Where to Stay in Cornwall

Palma Guest House – Situated in the heart of St Ives, this is an excellent place to base yourself in Cornwall. They have a number of comfortable rooms available and are located within easy walking distance of all this artsy town has to offer!

Selkies NQY   – Located in Newquay just a few hundred metres from the beach, this is a fantastic luxury option for those visiting Cornwall. Great for a romantic couples getaway, they have a number of luxe rooms available.

Lifeboat Inn – Situated on the bay in the lovely artist’s town of St Ives, this is a great place to stay for couples or families alike. They have a number of spacious rooms available and an option to include breakfast in the room rate.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse other places to stay in Cornwall!

Land's End

Days 9-10: Brighton

And finally on this 10-day southwestern England route, round out your time in the lovely coastal city of Brighton ! Located due south of London, Brighton is about a five-hour drive from Cornwall, but we recommend taking an entire day on the journey as there are so many incredible stops along the way .

Take the time to enjoy such places like Dartmoor National Park in Devon, the Jurassic Coast in Dorset, the beautiful seaside city of Bournemouth, the historic port city of Portsmouth or even the lovely New Forest in Hampshire before arriving in Brighton.

Once in Brighton, take the time to explore the city centre and the lovely, albeit rocky, beach. Of course, no trip to Brighton would be complete without enjoying yourselves at the iconic Brighton Pier.

If you want to get a bit more active and are not interested in exploring the city much, then the iconic walk along the Seven Sisters cliffs is easily accessible from Brighton. This is one of the most beautiful day hikes in the UK and will take you along the stunning rim of the famous white cliffs of this region of England.

One of the best views on Seven Sisters Cliffs Walk

Conveniently, Brighton is located only about a thirty- to forty-minute train ride from Gatwick Airport and other London area airports are easy to access from the city as well, so it makes for a perfect place to end your trip to England.

Where to Stay in Brighton

Artist Residence, Brighton – This quaint boutique hotel is perfect for those looking for something a bit more hip and trendy while staying in Brighton. They have a number of great rooms available, a great location and fantastic amenities including great common areas and a tapas restaurant on site.

Seadragon Backpackers – A great backpackers hostel perfect for budget travellers, they are well-located and have both dorm and private rooms available. They have great common areas and a central location perfect for exploring the best of what Brighton has to offer.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Brighton hotels!

Brighton Pier

London and North England Itinerary

If you’re interested in visiting London and then heading up north during your ten days in England, then this is the perfect itinerary for you. Exploring the historic cities and natural areas of the North, you’re sure to enjoy this route through England.

Again, this is another itinerary where it may prove helpful to have a car for some of it, especially for the bit through the Lake District National Park . If you want to save some money, consider renting a car for a few days from York before continuing on an England by train itinerary.

Spend your first three days of this route in the capital of London, following the same daily activities as mentioned in the Southwest England route above.

Days 4-5: York

From London, hop on a train or hire a car and drive north to the lovely walled city of York. If you do happen to drive (and it is recommended!), then make sure to spend the day stopping off at all of the incredible sites along the way and enjoying the gorgeous English countryside.

Some of these include the lovely university city of Cambridge , the historic city of Worcester, Warwick Castle, Robin Hood’s home of Nottingham or even the incredible Peak District National Park in Derbyshire in central England. You could, perhaps, even make a stop in Oxford or at the incredible Blenheim Palace. Or you could detour to Stratford-upon-Avon – the hometown of Shakespeare!

View of Kings College Chapel in Cambridge

On the next day, plan to spend it exploring the city. You can see a lot of York in one day and some of the highlights include walking along the city walls, exploring the incredible York Minster, taking in the ruins of St Mary’s Abbey in the Museum Gardens, wandering along The Shambles and learning about the city’s history at the York Castle Museum.

If you’d rather get out into nature, then explore more of rural Yorkshire with a trip to the North York Moors National Park or the Yorkshire Dales National Park — these parks are perfect for nature lovers and Bronte fans alike!

Where to Stay in York

The Queens Hotel – A great boutique option, this place is centrally located, has a number of comfortable rooms on offer and a great and hearty full breakfast is available at an additional cost.

The Grand, York – This is the place to stay in York if you want to be in the lap of luxury during your time in the northern city. They have many plush rooms to choose from, countless luxurious amenities, and a great location for easy sightseeing.

Astor York – An excellent, highly-rated hostel in York, this place is perfect for budget backpackers and solo travellers. They have a range of both private rooms and dorm beds available and are located within ten minutes of York’s historic centre.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more York hotels!

View of the York Minster from the City Walls

Days 6-7: Lake District

If you didn’t get out and enjoy the natural splendours of Yorkshire, it’s time to do so now in one of England’s most famous national parks — the Lake District. Located in Cumbria, this beautiful area is filled with incredible lakes, mountains and charming villages.

You can spend your time here going on countless walks — there are walks for all skill and fitness levels. There are also countless charming and historic villages to explore, classic pubs to warm up in, and just some absolutely beautiful scenery to enjoy.

Even if you’re not much of an outdoor lover, there s something for everyone in the Lake District and it is well worth taking the time to head out here before heading down to your final destination on this 10-day route through England.

Beautiful scenery in the Lake District

Where to Stay in the Lake District

The Cavendish Arms – A cosy, mid-range option in the Lake District is this historic pub, located in the lovely village of Cartmel. They have a number of clean and comfortable rooms available and a great breakfast available to enjoy each morning.

Embleton Spa Hotel – If you are after a luxury stay in the Lake District, then this is the perfect choice for you. Located in an 18th-century farmhouse in the beautiful countryside, they have a number of plush rooms available, private apartments, and countless amenities to make your stay a great one.

Kendal Hostel – A great option if you’re travelling on a tight budget or solo, this hostel is one of the best-rated in the Lake District. Situated in a historic Georgian townhouse in the town of Kendal, they have a range of dorm and private rooms available and good self-catering facilities.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Lake District hotels!

Days 8-10: Liverpool

And finally on the North England route, end your trip in the historic, vibrant and wonderful city of Liverpool .

Perhaps most famous for being the birthplace of a little-known band called The Beatles, there are plenty of Fab Four-centric sites to see in this city, however, there is so much more in this historic city.

Liverpool has seen a bit of a resurgence in recent years, especially around the newly refurbished Royal Albert Dock which is packed full of trendy restaurants and shops.

You can also learn about Liverpool’s seafaring history as a port city at the Merseyside Maritime Museum. Also worth a visit is the harrowing International Slavery Museum.

Albert Docks in Liverpool

Football fans will rejoice in the chance to tour Anfield Stadium , the home to Liverpool FC and Fab Four fans are sure to enjoy the Beatles Story or even a Beatles Tour.

You can even take the time to take a day trip to the nearby city of Manchester if you want to see more Northern English cities.

Where to Stay in Liverpool

The Dolby Hotel – A good option for mid-range travellers. this hotel has a great location overlooking the River Mersey. Located within easy walking distance of the top sites of the city, they have a number of rooms to choose from and breakfast included in the price.

Titanic Hotel Liverpool – If you want a luxurious stay in Liverpool, then look no further than this swanky hotel. Situated a stone’s throw from the top attractions in the city, they have countless amenities and wonderful, comfortable rooms available.

YHA Liverpool Albert Dock – A fantastic backpacker’s hostel, this is the perfect choice for solo and budget travellers. It is located in the centre of the city close to the top attractions and sites, they have both dorm beds and private rooms available and great common areas.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse other hotels in Liverpool .

Beatles history is everywhere in Liverpool!

Northern England Itinerary

If you’ve been to London already and would rather spend your ten days in England somewhere outside of the capital, then this is a great route for you. Still beginning and ending in London, this route is great for those who are planning a trip to the other parts of England and don’t want to concentrate on the capital city.

Day 1: London

Begin your itinerary in London and take a day to explore an area of the city that you haven’t had the chance to yet — there is always something to see and do in London. Take in the street art in Shoreditch, stuff your face at Broadway Market if it’s a Saturday or get lost in the expansive Kew Gardens or Richmond Park .

There are far too many things to do in London that it’s worth spending at least a day in the city even if you’ve visited before.

Brick Lane

Days 2-3: York

From London, it’s time to head to York. Follow the suggestions in the itinerary above for the ideas for how to spend your time in York.

Days 4-5: Lake District National Park

From York, head out into the great wide open and enjoy the lovely scenery and villages of the Lake District National Park for two full days.

Days 6-8: Liverpool

And from the Lake District, head to historic Liverpool and enjoy all of the fun things there are to see and do in this historic city.

Days 9-10: Cotswolds

On your final two days, it’s time to head back down south to explore an incredibly charming area of England within easy reach of London – the Cotswolds .

This region, located to the northwest of London, is famed for its quintessentially English towns with thatch-roofed homes and historic pubs. It is the perfect place to end your England itinerary.

Take the time to explore quaint villages like Bourton-on-the-Water, Painswick, Burford, Chipping Campden and countless others. These are some of the most beautiful towns in all of England and are sure to transport you back in time.

If you want to get out into nature, then make sure to check out the Cotswolds AONB (area of outstanding natural beauty) which is full of walking trails and lovely, bucolic vistas.

If you’re looking for a quaint and quiet place to round out this epic route through England, you seriously cannot go wrong with spending some time in the Cotswolds before flying home from London.

Charming Cotswolds Villages

Where to Stay in the Cotswolds

The Lamb Inn – This charming pub located in the village of Bourton-on-the-Water is the perfect place to rest your head in the Cotswolds. Oozing with charm, they have a range of comfortable and clean rooms available and a great pub downstairs to grab a pint a great bite to eat.

The Fleece – Located in the village of Witney not too far from Oxford, this is a great boutique hotel to stay at in the Cotswolds. T hey have a range of cosy and comfortable rooms available and a fantastic breakfast cooked each morning.

The Old Stocks Inn – Situated in the charming village of Stow-on-the-Wold, this lovely inn is the perfect place to stay if you’re on the hunt for a luxury stay in the Cotswolds. They have a number of beautiful rooms to choose from and lots of other amenities to make your stay fantastic.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Cotswolds hotels!

There are so many options of places to visit and things to see during your 10 days in England but, hopefully, these three great routes are able to help you plan the trip of your dreams! From historic cities, gorgeous natural scenery, inviting pubs and a wonderful coastline, England has so much to offer visitors — so make sure to see more than just London!

Are you planning a trip to England? Have you visited before? Let us know in the comments!

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Related Posts:

The charming village of St Ives is a great place to stay in Cornwall

The Perfect 3 Days in Cornwall Itinerary

Oxford Skyline

The Perfect Oxford Day Trip from London

The historic Royal Liver Building in Liverpool

Liverpool or Manchester: Which City to Visit?

Avatar photo

About Maggie Turansky

Maggie is a co-founder and writer for The World Was Here First. Originally from the US, she has lived in five different countries and has travelled to dozens more, both solo and with her partner, Michael. She particularly loves exploring Spain and spending time in the Caucasus and the Baltics. Read more about Maggie

Hi I am planning to ciné to the uk Dec/Jan 20 days

My plan so far is London 4 days 29/12-2/1. Then Bath as a base to tour the south. Can you recommend how many days in the south based at Bath then where in the North or ? I was planning on hiring a car in Bath or London.

Also open to any addition suggestions like quick visit to Ireland or Scotland if you feel it is with timeframe.

Thank you A

Hello Maggie, enjoyed your article on visiting England. Our family is planning to visit England from July 9 through July 20. We are from Boston, MA. Wanted your recommendation as we would also like to visit Scotland. How should I plan my iteneray.

Thank you, Khuzema Safri (Khuz).

Thanks for your comment! If you want to visit Scotland, you may find this article helpful in planning your trip: https://www.theworldwasherefirst.com/london-scotland-ireland-itinerary/

Leave a Comment Cancel reply

travelpassionate.com

10 Days in England Itinerary for First-Timers

Stonehedge - day trip idea from London

The UK is filled with historical and cultural destinations as well as a whole host of stunning landscapes so it would be a shame to just stay in one location when visiting England. In order to get a real taste of what England is all about, you want to travel the length and breadth of the country, visiting sights such as Buckingham Palace, the Tower of London, the Roman Baths, Oxford University, and Shakespeare’s hometown, Stratford-Upon-Avon. This jam-packed England itinerary does just that with visits to London, Bath, Oxford, Stratford-Upon-Avon, and York.

Spending 10 days in England is enough to give you an insight into the country’s cuisine, culture, and community spirit and allows you to tick off some real bucket list destinations. While you’ll still only scrape the surface of what England has to offer in this 10-day itinerary, it is a great whistle-stop tour of some of the best bits and it will certainly make your England-loving friends and family back home jealous!

This itinerary perfectly balances a range of destinations with some stints of travel, so you don’t feel as though you’re spending the whole time on the road but are not just stuck in one place either!

Read on to find out more about this 10-day England itinerary so you can start planning your trip…

Disclaimer: This post contains affiliate links. This means that should you click on certain links, and then subsequently purchase a product, I will receive a small commission.

Table of Contents

TRAVEL TIPS

🚗 Rent your car in advance

with Rentalcars and make your trip as convenient as possible

✈️ Book your flight in advance

To find the cheapest flights and most suitable option, use WayAway

🧾 Get your tickets and tours

with Viator and get the most out of your journey

10 days in England: Day One  – Arriving in London

You’ll likely be tired after your journey but make the most of every hour you have and get yourself out onto the streets to explore the most iconic locations of good old London Town!

Buckingham Palace and Trafalgar Square

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Make your way to Trafalgar Square where you’ll find Nelson’s Column towering 52 meters into the air and guarded by four stone lions. Take some moments to admire the other statues, especially ‘Fourth Plinth’, before making your way down the famous tree-lined street ‘The Mall’ for your first glimpse of Buckingham Palace – Be sure to get your timing right so you can witness the famous Changing Of The Guards ceremony too!

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Don’t just admire the Queen’s home from the outside though, during the Summer and selected days in Winter and Spring, when the Queen is not at home, you can go on a guided tour of the State Rooms and garden.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Love the Royals? Skip a visit to Churchill’s War Rooms and visit the Royal Mews, a working stables where the royal horses and carriages are kept, and The Queen’s Gallery which displays an array of artwork from the Royal Collection on a rotating basis.

Opening Times:

Changing Of The Guard – 10:40 am (for 11 am) daily during Summer. Mondays, Wednesdays, Fridays, and Sundays Spring, Autumn, and Winter. (Weather Permitting)

The State Rooms 9:30 am to 7:00 pm (closes at 6:00 pm in September)

The Royal Mews 10.00 am to 4.00 pm (closes 5.00 pm March to November)

The Queen’s Gallery 10.00 am to 5.30 pm (opens 9.30 am in the summer)

You might be interested in: – Changing of the Guard & Buckingham Palace Tour – Buckingham Palace: The Queen’s Gallery Entrance Ticket – Buckingham Palace: The State Rooms Entrance Ticket – Buckingham Palace: The Royal Mews Entrance Ticket

Churchill’s War Rooms via St James’ Park

From Buckingham Palace, enjoy a stroll through St James’ Park and make your way to Churchill’s War Rooms, the labyrinth of corridors and rooms located below the streets of Westminster where history was made. As well as seeing where the Prime Minister and his war cabinet ran the government (and directed the war) during the bombing raids, you’ll be able to learn more about the life and legacy of Winston Churchill at the museum.

Visit Churchill’s War Rooms and immerse yourself in the rich history of World War II on this enriching and emotionally stirring tour of London Westminster with a knowledgeable guide

Admission: £21. Included in London Pass

Opening hours: 9.30am to 6.00pm (1 July-31 August: 9.30am to 7pm)

Big Ben, The Houses of Parliament, and Westminster Abbey

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Parliament Square is just a short walk from the Churchill War Rooms and contains the Houses of Parliament, Westminster Abbey, and Big Ben.

Travel Tip – Big Ben is undergoing major repair work and will be covered in scaffolding with the bell only chiming for special events and 24/7 until 2021 – Delay your trip if you want the iconic shot in front of Big Ben looking its best!

Westminster Palace (the site of the Houses of Parliament) was built in 1840 and is a truly impressive building – You can book a 90-minute guided tour to see inside the 1,000-year-old Westminster Hall with a visit to the House of Commons and the Lords Chambers whilst learning how parliament works.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Westminster Abbey (the church where William and Kate got married) is located next to the Houses of Parliament and has been the site of all of the royal coronations since the time of William the Conqueror. It is the final resting place of 17 monarchs including Henry V, Mary I (Mary Tudor), Elizabeth I, Mary Queen of Scots as well as notable historical figures Isaac Newton, Charles Darwin, Charles Dickens, and Rudyard Kipling.

If you have the time and want to learn more about this historic Gothic church, guided tours are available.

Houses of Parliament £28 (cheaper if booked in advance)

Westminster Abbey £22. Included in London Pass. Tour costs an additional £5

Click here to book your Westminster Abbey entry tickets.

Cruise the River Thames

End your first day in London by cruising down the River Thames – There’s no better way to see the city as you cruise past Big Ben, the Tower of London, the London Eye, and Shakespeare’s Globe Theatre.

A range of cruises are available, get the basic sightseeing cruise if you’re on a tight budget, or splash out a bit with a Music Cruise by City Cruises where you can dance the night away as you pass by London’s most iconic sights. If that sounds a bit too strenuous, go on one of the more traditional dinner cruises – You can’t go wrong no matter which you choose.

I recommend: Westminster to Greenwich River Thames Cruise.

10 days in England: Day Two – London

The second day of our England itinerary takes us sightseeing along the river Thames, checking the major sights.

St. Paul’s Cathedral

St. Paul's Cathedral - London in 7 days

  Rebuilt in the Baroque style after The Great Fire of London in 1666, St Paul’s Cathedral cannot just be admired from the outside. Pass through the historic doors and admire the view across London from the Stone and Golden galleries then, with your traveling partner, try out the Whispering Gallery where, due to the architecture, you can whisper on one side of the dome and be heard on the other. If you’re into architecture, stop to see the exhibition on Sir Christopher Wren, the architect of St Paul’s, and learn about the challenges he overcame with his unique design.

Admission: £18 including a guided tour. Included in London Pass

Opening hours: 8:30 am to 4:30 pm

Click here to book your fast-track tickets to St. Pauls’s Cathedral.

The Tower of London

Tower of London - 7 days in London

This 900-year-old castle and fortress is most remembered for being a prison. Guarded by the Yeoman wardens (aka the Beefeaters, kitted out in their regal red and black uniforms emblazoned with ER), the tower is made up of 3 buildings; the Jewel House where the Crown Jewels are stored, the Royal Armories located in the White Tower, and the ‘Bloody Tower’, the prison where Anne Boleyn, Sir Walter Raleigh, the Two Princes, Lady Jane Grey, and even Guy Fawkes were all imprisoned.

Hear the history and stories from the Beefeaters on a guided tour as you see the ravens, the crown jewels, the Royal Mint. Also explore the bloody side with instruments from the torture chamber and Tower Green, the place where the prisoners were executed.

Admission: £26.80. Included in London Pass

Opening hours: 10.00 am to 5.30 pm

Click here to book your Tower of London and Crown Jewels Exhibition Ticket .

Tower Bridge

London Bridge - top things to do in London

You can’t visit London and not have your photo taken in front of this iconic landmark! Walk across the bridge and then admire the view from the banks of the River Thames below.

If Tower Bridge has always fascinated you, go beyond admiring the view and visit the Tower Bridge Exhibition, as well as learning about the engineering of this historic bridge you’ll get to see the old engine rooms and can walk the glass walkway 44 meters above the River Thames.

Admission: £9.80. Included in London Pass

Click here to book your tickets to the Tower Bridge. 

my experience at the Shard London

Measuring in at 309.7 meters high, this 95-floor skyscraper towers above the city with views reaching out for 40 miles on fine days. Go see the city of London from a different angle at the two viewing platforms, one on the 69 th floor and one on the 72 nd floor (the highest viewing platform in London). Splash out if you can afford it and enjoy lunch, afternoon tea, or a romantic dinner at The Shard. Wondering if it’s worth it? Read about my Shard experience here.

Admission for The View from the Shard: £30. Included in London Pass

Opening hours: 10 am to 10 pm Thursday to Saturday, 10 am to 7 pm Sunday to Wednesday

Click here to book your tickets to The Shard. 

The Southbank

Make your way to the River and take a scenic stroll down the dynamic tree-lined South Bank, the heart of London’s cultural scene, passing some of the most iconic London sights on the way. This pedestrianized riverside pathway is lined with street food vendors, cafes, and pubs, fairground rides, and so much more. Pass by London Bridge, Southwark Bridge, the Tate Modern, Oxo Tower Wharf, Waterloo Bridge and so much more. If you’re good for time you might choose to stop off at Borough Market or the Tate Modern before making your way further round the river to the London Eye.

The London Eye

Experience the London Eye

Keen for more aerial views of the city? Hop on one of the pods at the London Eye, England’s most popular paid attraction and the tallest wheel in Europe and enjoy the 360-degree view above Westminster. Pods have audio commentary so you know exactly what you’re looking down upon with views reaching as far as Windsor Castle (25 miles away!) on clear days. You can read about my London Eye experience here.

Click here to book your tickets to the London Eye. 

Admission: £27

Opening hours: dependent on the season, check online for details.

10 days in England: Day Three – London

Spend the day enjoying London’s finest museums. You won’t be able to see them all (unless you stick to Kensington and pop in to see the best bits of the Natural History Museum, the Victoria and Albert, and the Science Museum) so pick one or two to focus on based on your interests, and know that you’ll have to come back to London to cover all of the top museums!

The British Museum

uk trip itinerary 10 days

One of the best museums in the whole of the UK, the British Museum displays over 2 million years of human history with arts and antiquities from around the world – Indeed, a visit to the British Museum can allow you to travel to all corners of the world without leaving London! See the Rosetta Stone, Egyptian Mummies, the Parthenon Marbles, Roman Mosaics, and so much more not forgetting the temporary exhibitions.

Admission: Free

Tate Modern

If modern and contemporary art is your thing, lose yourself in the massive Tate Modern gallery where you’ll not only find paintings but photography, film, performance, and live art exhibits too. Galleries are organized by movement I.e surrealism, minimalism, abstract art, pop-art, etc with works by Dali, Miro, Picasso, Matisse, Cezanne, Pollock, Warhol, and many others.

Opening hours: 10.00 am to 6.00 pm (closes at 10 pm on Friday and Saturday)

Natural History Museum

Beloved for its dinosaur exhibition, the Natural History Museum teaches you everything about planet Earth (and beyond) and how human’s evolved. Learn about earthquakes and get on the earthquake simulator to see how it feels to have the earth truly move, see chunks of moon rock, a dodo skeleton, the largest gold nugget in the world and so much more. The museum is divided into 4 zones: Green for birds, insects, fossils, and minerals. Blue for dinosaurs, mammals, reptiles, and amphibians. Red for Earth, the planets, and the universe. Orange (only April-October) for the Wildlife Garden. Plan what areas to focus on before you go to make the most of your time!

Opening hours: 10.00 am to 5.50 pm

V&A Museum

Victoria and Albert Museum London

The Victoria and Albert Museum, known affectionately as ‘The V&A’ is the place to go if you want to indulge in decorative arts and design. Its 7 miles of galleries contain ceramics, textiles, post-classical sculptures, glass, jewelry, furniture, and more. Highlights include Tipu’s Tiger, the earliest known photograph of London from approximately 1839, The Great Bed of Ware (mentioned in Shakespeare’s Twelfth Night), Raphael’s Cartoons (not cartoons as we know them but a series of tapestries commissioned by Pope Leo X) and more.

Opening hours: 10.00 am to 5.45 pm

Science Museum

Discover the history and technology of medicine, nuclear power, electricity, and transportation including the space age at this fascinating hands-on museum with a 3D IMAX cinema, an interactive flight simulator, and discovery motion theatre alongside all the exhibits. See the oldest surviving steam locomotive, the first jet engine, a full-scale model of the Beagle 2 Mars lander, a replica of Sputnik 1, the Apollo 11 flight plan, proto-computors and so much more.

Opening hours: 10.00 am to 6.00 pm

The West End

uk trip itinerary 10 days

End your day of culture by heading to the West End to see a show. Enroute you can window shop at Oxford Street and Covent Gardens and get a selfie in Leicester Square, perhaps there will be time for a drink in Soho before or after the show too.

The West End is London’s equivalent of Broadway and is home to more than 40 theatres so there are plenty of shows to choose from including the long-running classics such as Phantom of the Opera (Her Majesty’s Theatre), Les Misérables (the Queen’s Theater), and Mousetrap (St Martin’s Theatre) plus comedy and an array of other shows and entertainment. The London Palladium is the most iconic and quintessential West End theatre whilst the London Coliseum is one of the largest theatres in London, no matter where you go or what you see, be sure to dress up!

10 days in England: Day Four – Bath

It’s time to leave the bright lights of London behind and head South-West to the historical city of Bath, the former home of  Jane Austen. Famed for its history, literature, art, and Georgian architecture, the UNESCO World Heritage city was founded in the 1 st century by the Romans who built a reservoir to control the natural thermal spring water, building the city around the baths from which Bath gets its name.

How To Get from London to Bath  

Train: Direct trains go from London Paddington to Bath Spa (just a few minutes walk from the city of Bath) approximately every 30 minutes.

Time: 1.5 hours

Cost: From £15.50

Bus/Coach: National Express has coaches departing every 90 minutes from 7.30 am until 11 pm from Victoria Coach Station to Bath Spa bus terminal (located next to the train station). Megabus also run a service from Victoria Coach Station to Bath.  

Time: 2 hours 20 minutes

Cost: From £5

You might be interested in: Bath: 1.5-Hour Walking Tour with Blue Badge Tourist Guide

The Roman Baths

The Great Bath at Roman Baths

Considered one of the greatest religious spas of the ancient world, allow yourself 2 hours to explore the Roman Baths which consist of the Roman Bath House, the Roman Temple, the Sacred Spring, and the museum. You’ll see the Great Bath, the saunas and plunge pools, even the changing rooms. There is an audio tour to help you understand what you’re seeing but during peak times a free guided tour takes place on the hour, every hour. Try the natural water from the spa water fountain (if you dare!) at the end of your visit.

Admission: £14.40-£19.80 depending on the time of year.

Opening hours: November-February: 9.30 am-6 pm. March-October 9 am-5 pm with selected late opening until 7 pm over Easter and 9 pm end June-August.

Bath Abbey

Located next to the Roman Baths, the 7th-century abbey towers above the city and is one of the finest and largest examples of Perpendicular Gothic architecture in the West Country.

Step through its historic doors to admire the interior with its stunning stained glass windows and vaulted ceilings (accessible when there are no services taking place), and be sure to climb the 212 steps to the top of the tower to admire the view across Bath whilst also getting to see the ringing chamber and bell chamber and getting to sit behind the clock face. If you want to get an in-depth understanding of the abbey, guided tours are available lasting 45 minutes.

Admission: Tower £8

Opening hours: Monday 9.30am-5.30pm, Tuesday-Friday 9am-5.30pm, Saturday 9am-6pm, Sunday 1pm-2.30pm and 4.30pm-6pm

Afternoon Tea

You simply must stop to enjoy afternoon tea in Bath, there are numerous quaint and historic tea rooms around the city but Sally Lunn’s is a must if you can get in. This tearoom is located in the oldest house in Bath (circa 1483) and serves the famous ‘Sally Lunn Bun’ which is a semi-sweet bread roll though they also serve cakes, scones, and those quintessentially British cucumber sandwiches!

Royal Crescent

Royal Crescent Bath

One of Bath’s most iconic landmarks, walk in the footsteps of Bath’s high society as you see the 30 terraced Georgian houses built in a 152-meter long sweeping crescent facing an attractive green. Though the cars spoil the scene somewhat, the Royal Crescent will likely look familiar to you if you’re a fan of period drama for it has been a film location for the 2008 film The Duchess and the ITV Drama Persuasion.

Optional Extra – Learn more about the Royal Crescent whilst seeing what these houses would have looked like inside during the 18th century with a visit to the Bath Crescent Museum.

The Jane Austen Centre

Learn all about the famous author Jane Austen and the time she spent in Bath at the Jane Austen Centre, a museum located in an original Georgian townhouse. Fans will know that Bath featured within several of her novels and played an important part in her life and her writing, here you can learn more about the life and works of Austen from experienced Regency-dressed characters.

Admission: From £11

Opening hours: 9.45am-5.30pm

10 days in England: Day Five – Salisbury and Stonehenge

Getting from bath to salisbury and stonehedge.

Train: Take the direct train from Bath Spa to Salisbury train station with South Western Railway or Great Western Railway and then jump on the hop-on-hop-off Stonehenge Tour Bus which leaves the station every 30-60 minutes calling at Salisbury Cathedral, Old Sarum, and Stonehenge.

Time: 1 hour (to Salisbury Train Station)

Cost: Train From £11, Stonehenge Tour Bus from £10

The order in which you see/do things will depend on your timed entrance to Stonehenge and whether you’re making your way independently to Salisbury or are part of an organized trip to Stonehenge.

One of the most iconic landmarks in England, Stonehenge is a mysterious place with its huge standing stones that measure 4 meters tall and 2 meters wide. Though the stones of this prehistoric monument can no longer be touched, and a walk around will be some distance away unless you buy a special ticket, its magical mysterious history will still rub off on you and you wonder what were they for, and how did they move them?!

At the nearby visitor center (a free shuttle bus moves visitors between the visitor center and the Stone Circle but you also have the option to walk) you can gain a lot of insight into the history and meaning of Stonehenge. Reconstructed Neolithic houses enable you to see how people lived 4,500 years ago when Stonehenge was being created and you can see the finds from archaeological digs in the area, finds including pottery, tools, jewelry, and human remains.

Admission: £17.50 when booking in advance – You will be given a 30-minute time slot in which to arrive so be sure you arrive in plenty of time.

Opening hours: 9.30 am to 7.00 pm  

Click here to buy your Stonehenge Admission Ticket.

Salisbury Cathedral

Salisbury - the perfect day tour from London

Whether you take an official tour to learn the history of this English Gothic cathedral or just pop in on your own, Salisbury Cathedral is well worth a visit! With beautiful cloisters and stained glass windows, its tower is Britain’s tallest spire and it’s possible to climb the 332 steps to look down on the city of Salisbury from above as part of a ‘Spire Tour’. Meanwhile, the Chapter House contains the Magna Carta – One of four original copies that remain in good condition dating from 1215.

Admission: Recommended donation £7, £13.50 Tower Tour

Opening hours: Monday-Saturday Main Cathedral 9 am-5 pm, Sunday Noon-4pm. Magna Carta and Tower are open at different times, check the website for details.

Salisbury wasn’t always located in its current location – prior to the 1300s, it was located here, uphill from modern-day Salisbury at Old Sarum. Originally an Iron Age hill fort, 2,000 years of history can be traced at this site with Roman, Norman, and Saxon activity. See the hill fort with the deep ditch that was originally the moat, castle ruins (the Medieval castle built by William the Conqueror in 1070), and the foundations of the original Salisbury Cathedral.

Admission: £6

Opening hours: 10am-6pm Summer, 10am-4pm Winter

10 days in England: Day Six – Oxford

How to get to oxford from bath.

Train: There is a regular train service with Great Western Railway from Bath Spa to Oxford via Didcot Parkway from 5.45 am through until 10.45 pm.

Time: 90 minutes

Cost: From £14.50

Bus: National Express has buses departing Bath Spa University to Oxford (Gloucester Green bus station in the center of the city) every 2 hours during peak hours.

Time: 4.5 hours

Cost: From £10

Known as the city of dreaming spires, Oxford is a beautiful historical university city that is compact meaning you can easily see all of the sights on foot. Admire the colleges as you walk in the footsteps of Oscar Wilde and C.S. Lewis, just watch out for the cyclists during term time!

I highly recommend: Oxford University and City Walking Tour with Alumni Guide .

Oxford Castle

England itinerary - Oxford

Built in the 10th century, Oxford Castle became a prison from the 14th century and was a working prison right up until 1996! Today, visitors can take a guided tour, led by a character guide, to learn the history of the 1,000-year-old castle/prison complex with access to the crypt, parts of the prison (other parts have been turned into a hotel!), St George’s Tower (great city views), and the Motte (the big earth mount opposite the building).

Admission: £12.50

Opening hours: 10am-4.20pm

Christ Church College and  College Cathedral

uk trip itinerary 10 days

The most famous college in Oxford and one of the grandest also featuring one of the most beautiful gardens, a look inside Christ Church College is a must! See some of the halls, the picture gallery, the cathedral, the inner courtyards, cloisters, and the gardens whilst learning the history of the college and about student life today. Lewis Carroll (real name Charles Dodgson) lived and worked here so you may note some things that inspired Alice in Wonderland as you wander around.

If you’re more of a Harry Potter fan, you aren’t imagining things when you see the dining hall for this was the inspiration for Hogwarts’ Great Hall and its entrance was used as the film set in Harry Potter and the Philosopher’s Stone when Professor McGonagall met the 1 st years.

Admission: £17 garden tour, £10 general admission. Free entrance to the college cathedral for services.

Opening hours: Monday-Friday only. No access July-August. Tickets are available 1 week in advance from the website .

Punting on the River Cherwell

uk trip itinerary 10 days

When the weather is fine there’s nothing more quintessentially English than punting along the river passing the beautiful University buildings and grounds out into the Oxford countryside. Take a guided tour so you can enjoy the ride or grab a pole and do it yourself.

Admission: From £18 per hour do it yourself or £30 for 30 minutes chauffeured.

Opening hours: Mid March – Mid October

The Tower at the Church of St. Mary the Virgin

uk trip itinerary 10 days

The spiritual heart of the oldest university in England, this simple yet historic church is visited and loved for the views it offers from its tower. Climb 127 steps to admire the view of the colleges and Radcliffe Camera – One of the best views in the city.

Admission: £5 for Tower

Opening hours: Monday-Saturday 9.30 am-5 pm, Sunday noon-5pm (6 pm July and August)

Covered Market

The historic covered market has outstanding Victorian architecture dating back to the 1770s and is filled with indie shops, craft stalls, and food/drink stands. Be sure to stop in for a fresh fruit juice or a less healthy smoothie as you take a look around – Perfect if you need to duck out of the rain.

Opening hours: Monday-Saturday 8am-5.30pm, Sunday 10am-4pm

The Radcliffe Camera

Oxford - Day trip from London, England

The most iconic building in Oxford, the beautiful, neoclassical, Radcliffe Camera is part of Oxford University and was built in 1737 to house the Radcliffe Science Library making it one of the world’s oldest libraries. There’s no camera here, the word ‘camera’ comes from Latin meaning ‘building’ or ‘vault’ therefore, this building is a reading room comprising 2 reading rooms (upper and lower) and a gallery. Bibliophiles can take a 90-minute guided tour inside.

Admission: £14

Opening hours: Selected times, tickets available 2 weeks before – Check website for details.

Bridge of Sighs aka Hertford Bridge

uk trip itinerary 10 days

This covered bridge, reminiscent of the Bridge of Sighs in Venice, rises above New Lane joining the Old Quad and New Quad of Hertford College together. Sadly, unless you’re a student at Hertford College, you can’t cross the bridge but it’s an iconic piece of architecture well worth passing by.

The Sheldonian Theatre

This 350-year-old building with its masterpiece of a roof is the official ceremonial hall of the University of Oxford. It was the first major design completed by architect Sir Christopher Wren who also designed St Paul’s Cathedral in London. Impressive from the outside with its funny ‘Emporer Head’ sculptures, step inside to be truly astounded and admire both the painted ceiling and the 360-degree panoramic views from the Cupola.

Admission: £3.80 (£8 guided tour)

Opening hours: 10 am-4 pm unless in use by the University

The Eagle and Child Pub

Otherwise known as ‘The Bird and Baby’, end your day of sightseeing at one of London’s most famous pubs , a regular meeting place during the 1930s and 1940s of J.R.R Tolkien, C.S Lewis, and friends who together were nicknamed ‘The Inklings’. Whether you just want a pint or stay for food, step inside to see the memorabilia hanging on the walls but breathe in, it’s tiny! Who knows, maybe you’ll be inspired to pen your own fantasy novel!

Opening hours: Monday-Saturday 11 am-11 pm, Sunday noon-10.30pm

10 days in England: Day Eight – Stratford Upon Avon

uk trip itinerary 10 days

How to Get from Oxford to Stratford Upon Avon

Train: There are 19 daily trains departing Oxford train station to Stratford Upon Avon, the fastest route going via Leamington Spa as there are no direct trains. An alternative route goes via Leamington Spa and Dorridge but it’s better to only change trains once if you have lots of luggage with you.

Cost: From £14

Coach: National Express has a direct, non-stop, service from Oxford to Stratford Upon Avon leaving daily at 11am – If that time works for you it’s the faster, easier, and cheaper option compared with taking the train.

Time: 70 minutes

This quaint medieval market town (often shortened to Stratford but not to be confused with the London district) is located along the banks of the River Avon and along with its iconic half-timber Tudor houses is famous for being the birthplace of William Shakespeare. The entire town is a living history to the life and times of Shakespeare, a must-visit destination for anyone interested in British history.

Shakespeare’s Birthplace

Visit the timber-framed Tudor house and gardens where William Shakespeare spent a good chunk of his life, being born and raised here alongside his siblings as well as living here for 5 years with his wife, Anne Hathaway until he was 23 years old. The house, now a fascinating museum, is full of exhibitions with costumed guides bringing 450 years of history to life plus resident actors performing Shakespeare Aloud in which you can ask them to perform parts from any play!

Admission: £17.50

Opening hours: Spring-Autumn 9am-5pm, Winter 10am-4pm

Anne Hathaway’s Cottage

uk trip itinerary 10 days

This 600-year-old thatched farmhouse with garden is as sweet as a chocolate-box! Make the journey 1 mile outside of Stratford to Shottery to visit the childhood home of Anne Hathaway, Shakespeare’s wife as you learn more about their love story. Step inside to see personal effects and other items dating back to Anne’s childhood including the original oak Hathaway bed. Don’t miss out on the sculpture trail if it’s a fine day!

Admission: £11.25

Opening hours: Spring-Autumn 9am-5pm, Winter 10am-3.30pm

Shakespeare’s New Place

Located on the site of Shakespeare’s last home where he lived from 1579 (once he was an established playwright, it thought that he would have written The Tempest during this time) until his death in 1616, ‘New Place’ is a new exhibition center that opened in 2016. It houses rare artifacts from Shakespeare’s life and includes a beautiful garden containing artwork. The original home was sadly demolished in 1759 but the new build follows the footprint of the original home.

Opening hours:  Spring-Autumn 9am-5pm, Winter 10am-4pm

Optional Alternatives

Fascinated by the life and times of the Tudor’s but overdosed on Shakespeare? Skip Shakespeare’s New Place and/or Anne Hathaway’s Cottage and explore the life and times of the Tudor’s. Or, if that’s still too much history to keep your family happy, break your day with butterflies at the butterfly farm or indulge in mechanical art and design at the interactive MAD museum.

Tudor World – £6 – 10.30am-5.30pm

Stratford Butterfly Farm – £7.25 – 10am-5pm or 6pm

MAD Museum – £7.80 – 10am-5pm

Take a River Boat Trip

uk trip itinerary 10 days

See Stratford-upon-Avon from a different vantage point as you sail/cruise/row/paddle down the picturesque River Avon – Pedal boats, canoes, motorboats, electric boats, and punts are all available to rent and there are also sightseeing tours with a barge tours that go through the town’s historic working lock plus a river cruiser tour.

  Admission: 45-minute Cruiser Tour: £6, 45 minute Barge Tour £6, a DIY boat trip from £7 per hour.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Watch One Of Shakespeare’s Plays

  End the day by watching one of Shakespeare’s plays performed by the RSC whether that’s Romeo and Juliet, Macbeth, Hamlet, or one of Shakespeare’s lesser-known plays. There are two theatres in Stratford-upon-Avon where the Royal Shakespeare Company (RSC) performs, The Royal Shakespeare Theatre and The Swan Theatre.

Admission: From £10

You can combine the sightseeing to Stratford Upon Avon with a visit to nearby Warwick Cast

How to get from Stratford Upon Avon to Warwick

Train: There’s a regular service from Stratford upon Avon to Warwick Parkway train station with trains departing roughly every half an hour from 6 am – 11pm. Some trains are direct, others require you to change at Dorridge which increases the journey time by a further 30 minutes.

Time: 25-30 minutes

Cost: From £7

Warwick Castle

Warwick Castle - The best day trips from Birmingham

This castle truly brings history to life for the whole family. Originally built as a wooden motte and bailey fort in 1068 for William the Conqueror, the stone castle seen today dates back to the 1100s with its conversion to a country house taking place in the 1700s. Enjoy numerous exhibitions and a live-action walk-through with actors and special effects along with the largest trebuchet in the world and birds of prey display. You can also visit the dungeons if you purchase an extended ticket.

Admission: From £21

Opening hours: 10 am-4 pm or 5 pm depending on the season. Some special openings until 9 pm, check website for details.

Click here to buy your Warwick castle entrance tickets.

Always wanted to stay in a castle? You can book the luxury Tower Suites in the 14 th century Caesar’s Tower. Cheaper options include a stay at the castle’s Woodland Lodges or Medieval Glamping!

The Mill Garden

Located beneath Warwick Castle, this delightful cottage garden with woodland area provides visitors with a tranquil oasis that covers half an acre. Follow the meandering footpaths by the river Avon and photograph the views of the castle, the ruined medieval bridge, Castle Millpond, and Victorian summer house.

Admission: £2.50

Opening hours: 9 am-6 pm April-October only

10 Days in England: Day 9 – York 

How to get from warwick to york.

Train: To get from Warwick Parkway station to York, there is a minimum of 2 changes with passengers needing to not just change trains but also change stations getting from Birmingham Moor Street station to Birmingham New Street station whether on foot, by bus, or by taxi for the onward journey to York.

Time: 3.5 hours

Cost: From 21.50

Bus: National Express work in collaboration with the coach company the Yorkshire Coastliner with a daily service departing Warwick at 9.30 am arriving into York at 4.30 pm (dependent on traffic). You must change coaches (and companies) at Leeds coach station where there is a 45 minute wait time.

Time: 7 hours

A visit to York, with its quaint cobbled backstreets, gives you a glimpse into the best of British history with its Roman, Anglo Saxon, Viking, Norman, Tudor, and Victorian influences all leaving their mark on this fabulous city plus there are many interesting things to do in York. 

I recommend: The York City Pass: Access 20 Attractions for One Great Price .

York Minster Cathedral

York Minster Cathedral

Officially known as the Cathedral and Metropolitical Church of St Peter in York, this is one of the largest cathedrals not just in England but in all of Northern Europe. An icon of the city, a church has stood on this site since 627 but the stunningly ornate Gothic building seen today dates from 1291 and took 60 years to complete. Take a free 1 hour guided tour to learn the history of the cathedral whilst visiting the undercroft and seeing the Great East Window which has the largest expanse of stained glass in the UK. An optional extra is a climb up the 275 tower steps to admire the panoramic views across the city and surrounding countryside.

Admission: Church: £11 Interior + Tower: £16

Opening Hours: Monday-Saturday 9am-4.30pm, Sunday 12.30pm-3pm

The Shambles

Like a real-life Diagon Alley (and what is thought to have inspired J.K. Rowling) The Shambles is the most photographed street in the city filled with quaint shops located within 14 th century overhanging timber-framed buildings with even tinier alleys (called snickways!) veering off of it. The perfect place to wander, you’ll come across 3 Harry Potter shops, a year-round Christmas shop, Viking shops, as well as the famous ‘The Shop That Must Not Be Named’.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Betty’s Tea Rooms

The most famous tea rooms in York, Betty’s is a must-visit (despite it being a busy tourist attraction now) so that you can try their legendary Fat Rascal Scones. These scones aren’t the usual kind, they’re crunchy on the outside and chock full of calories but should be tried at least once but you can enjoy a classic afternoon tea experience if you prefer.

Opening Hours: 9 am-9 pm

Jorvik Centre

End your first day in York with a journey beneath street level to discover what life was like in York when it was a Viking village. A mix of archaeological finds displayed in an exhibition center and an indoor theme park ride (you travel in a cart) through a lifelike Viking village complete with authentic smells, the Jorvik Centre really brings Viking history to life for the whole family.

Admission: £11

Opening Hours: 10am-5pm (4pm in Winter)

10 days in England – Day Ten – York to London

Clifford’s tower.

Clifford Tower York- - England itinerary

The last part of York Castle that still remains, climb to the top of this 13th-century tower (used as a prison and a Royal mint) and admire the panoramic view of York including the view of York Minster.

Tip – Best visited in Spring when the tower is surrounded by daffodils.

Admission: £5.40

Opening Hours: 10 am-6 pm

York Castle Museum

Don’t judge a museum by its name! Next door to Clifford’s Tower (on the site of the old castle) you’ll find the York Castle Museum which contains a weird yet wonderful mixture of things to see and do including the cells of the old York prison, a replica Victorian street, and a range of permanent and temporary exhibitions including Toy Stories which has a 100 year old carousel which is sure to take you back to your childhood, The Sixties exhibition with iconic objects of the era, and a 1914 exhibition showing you how the world changed forever.

Admission: £12

Opening Hours: 9.30 am-5 pm

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Chocolate Museum

Skip lunch and head to The York Chocolate Story, a chocolate museum that takes you on a 90 minute guided tour to unwrap the history of some of Britain’s famous confectionery companies for Rowntree’s, Terry’s and Craven’s were all started in York. With chocolate samples to taste in just about every room and a chocolate lollipop to make before you leave, you’ll learn that Terry’s created a chocolate lemon and a chocolate apple before landing upon that staple of Christmas, the chocolate orange and so much more.

Admission: £12.95

Opening Hours: 10 am-4 pm

National Railway Museum

Across the river, from the Yorkshire Museum, you’ll find the largest railway museum in the world. York’s National Railway Museum contains 100 trains on display so if you’re a train buff, you might want to skip a couple of the previous museums and spend more of your day here. Highlights include The Mallard; the world’s fastest steam locomotive, Queen Victoria’s Royal Train including her favorite carriage, the only Japanese bullet train on display outside of Japan and an original Eurostar train.

Admission: Free!

Now it is time to head back to London for your flight home.

How to get from York to London

Train: Trains depart approximately every 15 minutes from York to London King’s Cross station (direct) with an average of 30 trains per day making your return journey to London hassle-free. Book in advance to get the best prices on this 174-mile journey.

Time:  2 hours

Bus: National Express coaches depart York for London Victoria Coach Station every 1-2 hours throughout the peak daytime hours with more limited service at night. Some coaches are direct making for a hassle free journey, others require you to change at Leeds Coach Station with a 30-minute change over time.

Time: 6 hours

Cost: From £7.50

How to Get to and from Central London to The Airport

From heathrow airport.

The largest airport in the UK, Heathrow is located 18.5 miles from the city of London and covers the majority of long haul flights plus scheduled European flights. It is the hub for British Airways, Emirates, Lufthansa, American Airlines, and Virgin Atlantic. With 5 terminals, pay attention to which terminal you’ll be arriving in to help plan your onward journey into the city center.

Heathrow Express Train

The fastest way to get from the airport to central London, the Heathrow Express train departs for London Paddington every 15 minutes from terminals 2-3, and 5 with the first train at 5 am (6 am on Sundays) until 11.30 pm. If arriving into terminal 4, use the free shuttle train to transfer between terminals. Don’t worry about terminal 1 – It closed in 2015!

Time: 15 minutes

Price: From £16.50 when booked online in advance

Cash Saving Tip! The TfL Rail service (formerly known as the Heathrow Connect) also takes passengers to London Paddington, the journey takes longer (35minutes) due to stopping at other London stations including Ealing Broadway and Southall but the ticket price is cheaper.

Underground Train

Heathrow Airport is connected to the London Underground at terminals 2-3, 4, and 5 with the Piccadilly line taking passengers directly to central London. It is possible to use Oyster and travel cards for this journey to save money on a single cash fare. Trains run every 10 minutes from approximately 5 am until 11.30 pm with the exception of Friday and Saturday when the underground operates a 24-hour service. Note – There is no night train service to terminal 4, leave the underground train at terminals 2-3 and take the free shuttle to terminal 4.

Time: 50 minutes

Price: £6.00 single cash fare

National Express runs regular services from Heathrow Airport (terminals 2-3, 4, and 5 ) to London Victoria coach station. Coach services run every 30 minutes during peak hours with the first coach departing at approximately 3 am and the last at midnight.

Time: 35 minutes

Price: From £5

A classic black cab can be hailed from outside each of Heathrow’s terminals. A surcharge of £2.80 is added for fares starting from Heathrow airport but there is no extra charge for luggage.

Time: 30-60 minutes

Price: £48-£90

From Gatwick Airport

Located 29.5 miles South of London city center, Gatwick airport is the UK’s second busiest airport and handles international long haul flights as well as many European charter flights. It’s a hub for Easyjet, Thomas Cook, and TUI along with British Airways and Virgin Atlantic.  

Gatwick Express Train

The Gatwick Express train is the fastest option for reaching central London with non-stop trains departing the South Terminal (take the free shuttle train from North to South terminal if needed) to London Victoria train station every 15 minutes during peak hours. The first train departs at 5.40 am and the last train departing shortly after 11 pm.

Time: 30 minutes

National Rail Trains

Regular trains also depart the South Terminal. Thameslink runs services from Gatwick airport to London Bridge, Blackfriars, Farringdon, and St Pancras International whilst Southern Trains go to London Victoria train station via Clapham Junction and East Croydon.

Time: 30-45 minutes

Cost: From £8

National Express has regular services departing from both the North and South Terminals for London Victoria coach station with stops along the way. Coaches run 24/7 every 20-60 minutes.

Time: 1.5-2 hours

Alternative Option – On a tight budget and staying in West London? Check out easyBus with fares from as little as £2 each way going to Chelsea.

Luton Airport

Located 34 miles from London city, Luton Airport handles a lot of low-cost airline flights from around Europe being a hub for Ryanair and Wizzair. It does not have a train station connected to the airport, therefore it’s often easier to get the coach into London.

Up to 4 coaches depart Luton airport every hour with two routes, A1 goes to Victoria coach station whilst A2 goes to Paddington. Both routes have several stops on the way.

A shuttle bus (price included in the train ticket price when you select LUA/Luton Airport as your starting point rather than Luton Airport Parkway) takes passengers from Luton Airport to Luton Airport Parkway train station every 10 minutes during peak times with limited night trains. Regular train services run to London Bridge, Blackfriars, City Thameslink, Farrington, and London St Pancras.

Time: 40 minutes

Cost: £13-£18

Stansted Airport

Located 42 miles North East of London, the Stansted airport is a hub for Easyjet, Jet2, Ryanair, Tui, and Thomas Cook primarily serving European destinations with either holiday charter flights or budget flights. It has a train station on-site giving travelers easy access to London.

Stansted Express Train

The fastest way to get into London, the Stansted Express Train departs every 15 minutes during peak hours and every 30 minutes during the night for London Liverpool Street station with some trains stopping at Tottenham Hale underground station on the way to give passengers access to the Victoria underground line. The first train departs Stansted at 5.30 am and the last at 00.30.

Time: 47 minutes

On a budget? Compare the price of the regular Greater Angular train service with the Stansted Express – Both trains go to London Liverpool Street station in the same amount of time.

National Express coaches run 4 different services to central London every 30-60 minutes. Service A6 calls at Baker Street, Paddington, Marble Arch, and Portman Square. Service A7 goes to Victoria Coach Station via Whitechapel, Southwark, Waterloo, and Victoria Train Station. Service A8 goes to King Cross via Shoreditch, Liverpool Street, and Farringdon. Service A9 goes to London Stratford.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Sharing is caring!

Leave a Comment Cancel reply

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

Kate Abroad

Kate Abroad

Ultimate 10 Day UK Itinerary for 2024

Wondering how to spend 10 days in the UK? This itinerary has you covered with all the highlights of England and Scotland you can fit into a 10 day UK itinerary.

Here’s the deal: the UK is made up of four countries—England, Scotland, Wales, and Northern Ireland. If you’ve only got a week or two, you need to pick your spots wisely. I’ve been exploring the UK for over a year now, and I still feel like I’ve only seen a fraction of it.

This itinerary suggests spending six days in England and four days in Scotland. Got a second week? Why not try out Wales or dive deeper into Scotland and England?

We start in Edinburgh and finish in London, both cities have international airports, making them perfect starting and ending points. It’s best to travel in a straight line, either north to south or vice versa, to avoid wasting time doubling back. Let’s get going and explore the best of the UK!

The 10 day Scotland and England itinerary

This itinerary starts in Edinburgh and ends in London meaning you should buy an open jaw flight ticket. The itinerary can easily be done in either direction. In other words, you can fly to London and out of Edinburgh if that suits you better.

Day 1: Edinburgh

Spend the first day relaxing in Edinburgh.

Explore Edinburgh Castle and the Royal Mile. I love the view from Calton Hill. It is a viewpoint that overlooks the Edinburgh skyline.

There are several excellent museums such as the National Museum of Scotland and the Scottish National Gallery.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Day 2: Fort William

Drive time from Edinburgh Airport to Fort William: 3.5 hours

Distance: 214 km

Rent a car. There are several car rental companies close to the railway station or at the airport.

You have two options for driving to Fort William. One route is past Stirling, the other skirts the Cairngorms National Park.

Along both routes, there are plenty of castles you should stop at. My recommendation is to pick one route each way.

On the way to Fort William drive past Stirling and stop at Stirling Castle. Make sure you leave early enough to be at Glenfinnan when the afternoon steam train passes over the viaduct. The afternoon service only runs from early May to the end of September.

There are several  viewpoints to watch the steam train  cross the viaduct. Afterwards explore the Glenfinnan monument and museum before driving back to Fort William and checking in to your hotel.

Historic Glenfinnan Viaduct in the Scottish Highlands with a steam train passing over, surrounded by lush greenery and hills

Day 3: Ben Nevis (Alternative 1)

A short drive from Fort William is Ben Nevis, the highest mountain in the UK. It is 1,344 metres high but it is harder to climb than you might think. For anyone who is fit and likes the outdoors this is a must whilst in Scotland.

The easiest route to the top is called the Mountain Track and takes about 7 hours.

One thing you can never guarantee in Scotland is the weather. You can  climb Ben Nevis  from May to the end of September and you should plan for a day with good weather forecast. It is not an easy climb so it won’t be for everyone so an alternative day 3 itinerary has been provided below.

View from the summit of Ben Nevis, featuring two stone cairns against a backdrop of distant mountains and Loch Linnhe, essential for a 10-day UK itinerary

Day 3: Steam train to Mallaig (Alternative 2)

Drive time from Fort William to Mallaig: 1 hour and 15 minutes

Distance: 69 km

If you didn’t make it to Glenfinnan on day 2 this is the perfect time to do a day trip on the “Harry Potter Steam Train”, actually called  the Jacobite steam train . It runs from late March to the end of October.

The train takes 2 hours from Fort William to Mallaig. You then have 2 hours to explore the small fishing village of Mallaig before returning on the train to Fort William.

The downside is the train has become very popular so it is difficult to book tickets. As an alternative, you can either drive to Mallaig or get the ‘standard’ train. The standard train operates on the same route and is much cheaper.

Personally, I would either take the Jacobite or drive. If travelling by car you can stop to see the steam train cross the viaduct, visit the cute seaside village of Arisaig and admire the many beaches in the area.

Days 4: Edinburgh

Drive time from Fort William to Edinburgh: 3.5 hours

Distance: 235 km

Return to Edinburgh using the route that skirts the Cairngorms National Park. Stop at Blair, Blackcraig or Taymouth Castle. You will also pass Loch Ness where you can have a look for the monster.

I don’t recommend using a car in Edinburgh. You can walk pretty much everywhere in Edinburgh and having a car just means that you have to pay for expensive parking and it will limit where you can stay.

In the afternoon either visit the places you didn’t see on day one or try a Scottish Whisky Experience .

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Day 5-7: London

Train time from Edinburgh to London: 4 hours and 45 minutes

Flight time: 1 hour and 20 minutes

On day 5 it is time to travel to England and visit London, the most famous and biggest city in the UK. This will be the longest travel day in the itinerary, but at least you can sit back and relax rather than having to drive yourself.

There is little difference time-wise between taking the train or a flight. Trains take you from city centre to city centre with stops at northern cities like York and Newcastle . Flight time is less but by the time you have got to and from the airports it works out similar. However, it is often cheaper to fly than taking the train.

Train tickets can be booked 3 months in advance and you should book tickets as early as you can. The cheapest tickets are for one particular train and do not allow for changes. It is incredibly expensive to buy tickets on the day in the UK so avoid that.

Make sure you reserve a seat with your booking, Trainline does it automatically but not all sites do and you can end up standing all the way to Edinburgh (this happened to my roommates).

You could easily spend a week in London and not run out of things to do. If it is your first time in the city then start with the highlights.

Big Ben and the Houses of Parliament illuminated by a vibrant sunset, reflecting the golden hour glow over the Thames River.

Westminster

Take a double decker bus and hop off at Westminster Abbey. After seeing the Coronation Chair and the Royal Tombs in the abbey cross the square to the Houses of Parliament.

The views of Big Ben are best from Westminster Bridge. Cross the bridge and walk along the South Bank. Join the queue for the London Eye for even better views of Westminster and Big Ben.

During the summer the South Bank is full of performers and street food stalls. Walk along the Thames to Tate Modern. There is always a free exhibition that is worth checking out.

Afterwards cross the Millennium Bridge to St Paul’s Cathedral. Continuing along the river you can walk all the way to Tower Bridge and the Tower of London.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

London is full of excellent museums such as the British Museum, the National History Museum and the V&A.

The best places to go shopping in London are Oxford Street and Regent’s Street. For most of us Harrods is out of our price range but it is fun to look around this world-famous store.

Day 8: Cotswalds

Train time from London to Oxford: 55 minutes

Drive time from Oxford to Broadway: 1 hour

Distance: 66 km

Take the train to Oxford to avoid having to drive in London. Unless you are used to the traffic and driving on the left it is better to pick up your hire car in Oxford.

It is one hour by train from London to Oxford. Pick up a car at the train station in Oxford and drive north to Broadway, one of the prettiest villages in the Cotswolds.

My favourite area in Broadway is the eastern end of High Street. This is where you will find Broadway Tower. From the top, there are sweeping views of the village and the countryside.

Back in the village try a cream tea at one of the tea shops. There is no more quintessential English way to end the afternoon than having scones, clotted cream and tea in a cute Cotswold village.

Days 9 and 10: Oxford

Drive time from Broadway to Oxford: 1 hour and 20 minutes

On driving back to Oxford stop at some of the other villages in the area. My favourite villages in the Cotswolds are Snowhill, Stow-on-the-Wold and Burford.

Return to Oxford in the late afternoon and drop off your hire car. Like in the other larger cities it is better not to have a car when exploring Oxford city centre. Many hotels don’t have parking and it is easier to explore on foot.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

The university colleges and spires of Oxford are well known from TV shows such as Inspector Morse and Lewis. Oxford is one of the most recognisable cities in the UK.

Many of the colleges are open to visitors. The two most interesting ones are Christ Church and Magdalene. My favourite buildings in Oxford are the Bodleian Library and the Radcliffe Camera.

At the bottom of the University Church of St Mary the Virgin is a café called Vaults & Garden. It is the perfect place to have a coffee and admire the architecture of the Radcliffe Camera.  

You can also try your punting skills on the river. Punting requires good balance and sometimes the pole gets stuck in the mud. A picnic on the banks of the river might be a safer way to watch the boats glide past.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

How to travel around the UK on this itinerary

In the largest cities such as London, Edinburgh and Oxford I recommend not using a car. Parking is expensive and difficult to find and in London it is much quicker to take the tube than to drive.

Buses and trains are a good way of getting between different cities such as between London, Oxford and Edinburgh.

However, as soon as you get out of the larger cities it is best to have a car. Travelling by public transport will make it much more time consuming to visit the main sites. Many places, particularly in Scotland and around Oxford, are difficult to get to by public transport and you may have a long walk to the sites.

I would recommend renting a car for the sections of your trip where there is limited public transport, so really when you are exploring the Highlands in Scotland and the villages of the Cotswold outside Oxford.  

Between the larger cities such as Edinburgh to London and London to Oxford I would recommend taking the train. From Edinburgh to London is a long drive and you want to avoid driving in London unless you are used to the traffic and don’t mind paying a lot for parking.

You can find good deals on Trainline which is where I buy all my tickets.

One-way rentals are expensive so it is best to hire a car for a few days in Scotland and return the car before hiring another in Oxford to explore the Cotswolds.

You can check out rental car prices and book at DiscoverCars.com .

Edinburgh Castle perched atop Castle Rock, viewed from a distance, under a cloudy sky, highlighting its historic and imposing structure.

Where to stay in the UK

This itinerary is based on staying in hotels and B&Bs. In the larger cities, there are plenty of hotels to choose from. In the countryside, I usually stay in B&Bs or boutique hotels.

In smaller towns and villages it is important to book well in advance. Booking early means at least 6 months in advance and in the more remote parts of Scotland even further in advance.

Demand far outstrips supply and the best places can sell out shortly after dates open for the most popular weeks in the summer. I always book online via Booking.com as they have a flexible cancellation policy in case your plans change.

Alternative: 1 week UK itinerary

If you only have one week in the UK you really have to pick and choose what you want to see. This itinerary could easily be done over 2 weeks giving you more time in each location rather than trying to squeeze everything into a 1 week trip.

Anyone short on time could prioritise the two great cities of London and Edinburgh. However, I think you will then be missing the most scenic parts of the UK.

Combining the UK’s cities, the countryside and the cute traditional villages makes for a fantastically varied holiday.

Alternative: 2 week UK itinerary 

This longer itinerary visits the same places as in the shorter itineraries but by spending more time in each place you can explore in more detail.

There are also many other day trips you can do from London like Rye , a super cute town in East Sussex or Salisbury , near Stonehenge.

For a slower-paced option you could take the 10 day UK itinerary and use the extra days for travelling which will give you more quality time in each location.

  • Fort William
  • Travel to Edinburgh
  • Travel to London
  • Travel to Cotswolds

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Alternative: 3 week UK itinerary 

With 3 weeks to spend in the UK you can add a completely new destination. Choose between Devon and Cornwall or Wales for the extra week.

The two destinations are completely different. Wales is full of castles and green hills. Devon and Cornwall are favourite summer holiday destinations for the British. The seaside towns and beaches provides a complete contrast to London and Scotland.

For these additions pick up your rental car at the airport you will be flying out of rather than in Oxford. This will limit where you can stay in Oxford but it is worth it to make the onward travel easier.

For the final week choose between the two itineraries below:

  • Drive from Oxford Tenby
  • Return to the airport

Devon and Cornwall

  • Drive from Oxford via Bath to Penzance
  • Mt Saint Michel

Living in London and having travelled all over the UK it is hard for me to pick what to recommend out of so many good options. There are many amazing places that deserve a mention on this list.

The options listed in this post are some of my favourites but whether you take all or part of these itineraries I can guarantee you that you will have a great experience.

Happy travelling!

UK Travel Resources

  • Find the best prices on hotels with flexible cancellation at Booking.com
  • Find awesome day tours on Get Your Guide
  • Book train tickets and buy a discount Railcard from Trainline
  • Save on attractions with a city pass from Go City (including London and Edinburgh)
  • Sort your pounds and other currencies with a Wise multi-currency card

' src=

Kate is the founder of Kate Abroad. She has travelled to nearly 40 countries from Austria to Vanuatu, and lived in 3. She's on a mission to empower other Gen Zs and Millenials travel affordably by sharing helpful travel guides, stories and tips to over 200,000 readers.

Similar Posts

14 Must-Visit Rooftop Bars in Newcastle [2024]

14 Must-Visit Rooftop Bars in Newcastle [2024]

Looking for the best rooftop bars in Newcastle for your next night out? Look no further, this guide has 14 of the hottest Newcastle rooftop bars to add to your…

Ultimate Rye Day Trip Itinerary + Guide for 2024

Ultimate Rye Day Trip Itinerary + Guide for 2024

A day trip to Rye from London is a must do experience, it’s only a short train ride and you can be in one of the most beautiful towns in…

Top 10 Things to Do in Salisbury in 2024

Top 10 Things to Do in Salisbury in 2024

If you’re planning a trip to Stonehenge you might be wondering what the options are for things to do in Salisbury. This article has 10 of the best Salisbury attractions…

Essential 3 Days in Belfast Itinerary for 2024

Essential 3 Days in Belfast Itinerary for 2024

Looking to spend 3 days in Belfast, the capital of Northern Ireland? In this itinerary, we will help you prioritize what to do, see, and stay in Belfast if you…

10 Reasons Why York is Worth Visiting in 2024

10 Reasons Why York is Worth Visiting in 2024

Wondering if York is worth visiting? We can tell you it absolutely is, here’s 10+ reasons why. York is a special kind of city. You’ll not find the high rise…

Chasing ADVNTR

An Epic 10 Day UK Itinerary for England and Wales

' src=

There are so many incredible things to see in the United Kingdom, it can be hard to decide what to include on a 10 day UK itinerary. When we first started planning our visit, we spent hours trying to decide whether to visit Scotland, spend the whole time in England, or visit Wales. We put this itinerary together this London to Wales tour based on that research and loved getting to spend some time in London and get out into the countryside for some hiking and exploring.

This 10 day UK itinerary in Wales and England is for you if you want to get a taste of London and then explore the more wild side of Wales including several hikes along the coast finishing with some time a small English countryside town. We did this itinerary as a family of 5 when our kids were 8, 11, and 11, but this would make a great trip with younger kids or just adults.

Some of the highlights of this itinerary include:

  • Seeing the most famous sites in London
  • Windsor Castle
  • Pembrokeshire
  • Hiking and biking in Snowdonia
  • Visiting the Peaks District

Read more below on exactly how to take this 10 day England and Wales itinerary as well as general information to help you plan your visit to the United Kingdom . You can also find suggestions on how to lengthen or shorten this itinerary based on how much time you have. You can easily adjust this to a 9 day UK itinerary or add a few days to make an 11 or 12 day itinerary.

Overview of 10 Day UK Itinerary for England and Wales

Below is a snapshot of the itinerary broke up into days. This itinerary assumes that you will arrive in England the day before the itinerary starts. It is possible to arrive early on the first day, but you may have to adjust your plans a bit. This Wales and England 10 day itinerary also assumes that you will either leave in the evening of day 10 or the following day.

  • Day 1: London
  • Day 2: London

Day 3: Stonehenge to Tenby to Pembrokeshire

  • Day 4: Pembrokeshire, hike,
  • Day 5: hike Drive to Dolgellau
  • Day 6: Hike Cadair Idris
  • Day 7: Morning bike and explore to barmouth
  • Day 8: Drive Dollgelau to Miller’s Dale – stop by Lakes
  • Day 9: Chee Dale Stepping Stones – explore Miller’s Dale

Day 10 Windsor Castle

10 Day UK Itinerary: Biking from Dolgellau to Barmouth

How to Use this England and Wales Itinerary

You can use this itinerary by booking this exact itinerary or select part of this trip. You can also use just the Wales portion of this trip if you are trying to put together a 5 days in Wales itinerary. This itinerary also assumes you will be visiting during the warmer months, but it is possible adjust to do this in the winter, you will just need to dress appropriately and keep an eye of the weather during your hikes.

Map of 10 Day UK Itinerary in England and Wales

Complete Details of this 10 day UK Itinerary in England and Wales

Day 1 and 2: london.

Start your 10 day UK itinerary with 2 full days in London. London is an incredible and large city, and it’s hard to see everything even with a week in town. With 2 days in London, you can see the highlights and most popular sites. Both days are very full, so you may decide to leave off one or more of the sites based on the time and your preference.

For your first day, start the morning at Buckingham Palace for the changing of the guard.

If you have time before the ceremony, you can enjoy some time in Hyde Park. You will want to confirm that the ceremony is happening on the day you are visiting (you can see the schedule here ). After the changing of the guard, wander through Trafalgar Square and strop for lunch in Covent Garden. In the afternoon, head towards the Thames and cross Westminster Bridge. There are 4 good sites right nearby. Catch a look at Big Ben, Westminster Abbey and Parliament or you can cross the river and take a ride on the London Eye.

At this point it is likely late afternoon. Hop of one of the Thames River cruises for a break from walking and to see some of the more famous sites from the river. Get off at the Tower of London. If there is still time, take a tour of the Tower of London and walk across Tower Bridge before grabbing dinner along the waterfront.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

For day 2 in London , you will enjoy some of the museums, and markets. Start your day at Camden market before making your way to the British Museum. London has several excellent museums to choose from, many of which are free. The National Gallery is also a great choice.

In the afternoon you can choose from several activities. We suggest trying out one of the London High teas, or if you are visiting with kids you can go to the London Zoo or Harry Potter World or take a Harry Potter tour .

Should you take a tour of London?

To see everything you want to see in London your days will be jam packed. If you want to make sure to see everything and you are willing to pay a little extra, taking a tour of London may be the best option. In fact, most tours will only cost a little more and can actually be a good deal. You can find lots of tours at Viator .

Where to Stay in London

London is large and there are many options for places to stay. The best place to stay with limited time is right downtown. You can search for a hotel downtown through booking.com , but we also recommend the London Marriot Hotel County Hall : This is a great location right along the Thames. You can easily walk to many of the most popular sites and you have great views right from the hotel. You can also find several other Marriot hotels in the city if you like Marriot.

On the third day of your 10 day UK itinerary, you will need to rent a car. You can do this right away when you arrive in London, but parking can be difficult, so if possible wait to rent a car until day 3. We had good luck finding rental cars through rentalcars.com .

Try to get an early start and head out of the city to Stonehenge. The drive takes about 2 hours depending on traffic. You will want to make sure you book your tickets to Stonehenge in advance. Try to reserve one of the earlier time slots to avoid the crowds. You should plan to spend about 2 hours at Stonehenge and in the visitor center.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

After exploring Stonehenge, continue driving west into Wales to get to Pembroke. This drive takes about 4 hours and there are lots of interesting places to explore along the way if you have the interest and time, including Bath and Cardiff.

Once you arrive in Pembrokshire, you can check into your hotel and grab a bite to eat.

Where to Stay in Pembrokeshire

Pembrokeshire is the entire region of southwest Wales and you can find several great towns to use as a base for the next 2 nights. We stayed in Millford Haven, but recommend looking closer to Pembroke or in the cute town of Tenby.

The Burrows Bed and Breakfast : A great location and lovely hotel in Pembroke.

The Coach House Hotel: Once a medieval coaching inn, you can walk into Pembroke from this historic hotel.

There are many excellent places to stay in Tenby – you can see some of the best places here.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Day 4: Pembrokeshire

Start the day with an incredible coastal hike that includes a visit to Barafundle Bay and through the Bosherston Lakes. This is a roughly 6 mile hike and is one of our favorite coastal hikes anywhere. You can stop at the café for a mid-morning snack and even take a swim if you are feeling daring. After your hike, make sure to visit St. Govan’s Castle.

Spend the afternoon exploring the beautiful village of Tenby. You can grab lunch here and visit the beach if the weather is warm. In the late afternoon visit Pembroke Castle. We attended a Shakespeare play in the castle and loved watching the sun set in the castle.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Day 5: Drive to Dolgellau

Get a morning start and head towards the Welsh town of Dolgellau. On the way stop for another coastal hike. The Pembrokeshire Coastal Hike follows the coast of Wales for 186 miles and you can find many incredible hikes along the route. We did a section of the Pembrokeshire Coastal hike from Cwmtydu Cove but truly any stretch of this trail is worth walking.

Finish the day by arriving in Dolgellau. We loved this little town and spent several days here. It is a small town, so if you are looking for more to do, you may want to consider one of the bigger towns in the area. We found Dolgellau the perfect jumping off point for exploring Snowdonia.

Where to Stay in Dolgellau

Most of the places to stay in Dolgellau are small apartments, houses, or glamping opportunities. Below are a few of the best options:

Farm Stay Snowdonia Coast:  This is a fun and unique stay on a farm.

Try Clamping on the Coast:  This is a fun alternative to camping – these little huts/pods are a beautiful place to stay

Dwy Olwyn : This is a lovely little hotel in the country with a terrace and a garden just a 10 minute walk from town.

Elden Row : These apartments are a great option and centrally located in town

10 Day UK Itinerary: Hiking Cadair Idris

Day 6 and 7 Hike Cadair Idris and Bike the Mawddach Trail to Barmouth

For your two days in Snowdonia, you will spend 1 day hiking and 1 day biking. You can switch up the days depending on the weather.

Cadair Idris is the second tallest mountain in Snowdonia and hangs right over the town of Dolgellau. This is an incredible mountain hike. There are several different trails you can take to reach the summit. We took the easiest route up the Pony Path.

Learn more about hiking Cadair Idris.

For your other day in Dolgellau, rent bikes right in town and bike to Barmouth of the Mawddach Trail. This 9 mile trail is wide and easy to ride and takes you through the Estuary to the town and beach of Barmouth. Once you arrive in this coastal town you can grab lunch and enjoy walking around and exploring the beach. We had a windy/rainy day so we spent part of the day at the arcade in town.

Day 8: Drive Dolgellau to Miller’s Dale

Today you will drive from Dolgellau to the quaint town of Miller’s Dale located in the heart of the Peak’s District in England. The drive takes about 3 hours but you can make a day of it by stopping at Cregennen Lakes or the city of Manchester.

Once you arrive in Miller’s Dale and settle in, you can explore the area on foot. There are many excellent walking trails in the area.

Where to Stay in Miller’s Dale

The best hotels in Miller’s Dale and small with loads of character. You can see a list of some of the best Miller’s Dale Lodging options here.

Angler’s Rest: This is a cute little spot in a great location. We didn’t stay here but we did eat here twice during our visit.

YHA Ravenstor: This is a beautiful hotel that sits on 70 acres overlooking the river.

10 day UK Itinerary: Chee Dale Stepping Stones

Day 9: Explore the Peaks District: Chee Dale Stepping Stones

There are so many excellent hiking trail near Miller’s Dale. We loved the hike on the Chee Dale Stepping Stones and spent the morning here and the afternoon hiking some of the other nearby trails.

You can see more details on hiking the Chee Dale Stepping Stones as a loop Trail.

For your last day of this 10 day UK Itinerary, drive south and stop at Windsor Castle. The drive from Miller’s Dale to Windsor takes about 3.5 hours. You can stop in the town of Windsor for lunch and then take a tour of the castle. I recommend the audio tour to get the most out of your visit. You can see more about visiting Windsor Castle.

After your visit to Windsor, it’s time to head on your way. If you have a late day flight, you can head to the airport.

We did almost this exact itinerary during the summer of 2019 and have completely updated the information since then. We’ve now travelled extensively in Europe and my kids still remember this 10 day UK Itinerary as one of their favorite trips.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

How to Adjust this Itinerary

How to shorten this 10 day uk itinerary.

If you don’t have enough days for this 10 day UK itinerary, it’s easy to keep the general locations and shorten it by one day. The first option is to spend only 2 nights in Dolgellau. After you finish the activities on the 2nd day in Dolgellau, simply leave mid-afternoon and drive straight to Miller’s Dale.

If you only have 1 week in England and Wales, you will have to cut out one of the smaller towns. After visiting Dolgellau – simply drive straight back to London instead of stopping at Miller’s Dale. If you have time, stop at Windsor Castle, otherwise head right to the airport.

How to Lengthen this to a 11 or 12 Day UK Itinerary

If you have more time, there are so many ways to make this into a longer itinerary. You can easily spend more time exploring Northern Wales or you could add some time on the southern coast of England. The final suggestion for lengthening your trip is to spend an extra day in London. There is so much to do here that 3 or 4 days in London is ideal.

5 Days in Wales Itinerary

Another option is to use just the Wales part of this itinerary as a 5 day Wales Itinerary. To do this, basically use the itinerary above for just the days 3-8. Plan to spend 2 days in Pembrokeshire and 3 days in Snowdonia. This gives you time to hike on both the Pembrokeshire Coastal Trail as well as some of the mountains and lakes in Snowdonia.

Things to Know When Visiting England and Wales

How many days do you need for an england and wales itinerary.

We love visiting countries for 10 days. With just a week it feels like by the time you get into the flow, the week is over. With 10 days, you can enjoy exploring London and spend a full week in the countryside. With 2 weeks, it’s possible to visit Scotland as well.

When is the Best time of Year for this 10 Day UK Itinerary?

The UK is a great year round destination, however if you are planning a lot of outdoor activities, the spring, summer and fall are best. Summer tends to be the busiest time of year in London and England in general. If possible visit during May/June or Sept/Oct.

We visited at the very end of August and found the temperatures comfortable and the crowds low.

Driving in England and Wales

For this itinerary you will need to rent a car. In the UK, you will drive on the left side of the road and you will also sit on the opposite side of the car to drive. Many of the rental cars are automatic so you will need to shift with your opposite hand if you are used to driving elsewhere. This is something to be aware of when you rent a car here.

In addition, many of the road (especially in Wales) were very narrow. It would be almost impossible to drive a large car on some of these roads. When you are passing other cars, take your time and you will be fine.

You can search for reasonable car rentals at rentalcars.com

What to Pack for this 10 Day UK Itinerary

Even if you visit during the summer, you will want to pack plenty of layers and rain gear for this 10 day UK itinerary. We had generally good weather, but hiking along the Welsh coast was often cool and were glad to have rain gear for warmth.

In general I would pack several pairs of hiking shirts , both long and short sleeved as well as shorts and pants. For London, you want some clothes that are comfortable to walk around town in.

For the hiking trails, you should have a pair of hiking boots and another pair of comfortable shoes if these get wet. Pack rain pants and a jacket and one extra warm layer. Don’t forget to pack a bathing suit in case you get a hot day and want to go for a swim!

Other Amazing Itineraries

uk trip itinerary 10 days

10 Day Ecuador Itinerary: Andes and the Amazon

Explore the incredible Amazon rainforest and hike through the Andes on this 10 day Ecuador itinerary.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

An Incredible 7 Day Slovenia Itinerary: A Complete Guide

Visit Lake Bled, hiking it Triglav National Park and kayak on the Soca River.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

7 day Iceland Itinerary: Driving the Amazing Ring Road

Explore the epic country of Iceland on this 7 day itinerary. Drive the entire Ring Road to see waterfalls, glaciers, black sand beaches, and more.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

About the Author: Gretchen Stuppy Carlson

' src=

A passionate adventurer dedicated to getting families outside and exploring. Gretchen is an expert in adventure travel with 15+ years of experience working in outdoor education and travelling with her own family.

View all post by Gretchen Stuppy Carlson | Website

What's Your Next Adventure?

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Where to go Horseback Riding in St Lucia

uk trip itinerary 10 days

The Windjammer Landing St Lucia

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Looking for the Best Catamaran Tours St Lucia has to offer? Here’s our Top Pick

Travel With Me 24 X 7

Travel itinerary, Travel guide and Destination reviews

Best UK Itinerary 10 Days (England + Scotland)

Read a detailed day-wise UK itinerary 10 days with city-to-city commuting options, hotel stay options, things to do, vegetarian food options, adventure activities, and many more FAQs for first-timers to the UK. 

ALSO READ :👉🏼  Best Wales Road Trip Itinerary 3 Days – Planning A Trip To Wales

uk itinerary 10 days

UK Itinerary 10 Days

Read day-wise UK in 10 days – a perfect UK itinerary 10 days with all helpful information. 

Day 1: Arrival in London (UK Itinerary 10 Days)

Buy London Pass with access to 85+ attractions

  • Arrive at one of London’s airports (Heathrow, Gatwick, or City Airport).  
  • Take a taxi, train, or bus to The Blackbird hotel in Greater London .

uk itinerary 10 days - 10 days in uk itinerary

  • Enjoy a traditional English afternoon tea .
  • Overnight stay in London.
  • Perfect London Itinerary 3 Days For Family (Hotels + Things To Do + FAQs)

Day 2: London Sightseeing

  • Take a hop-on-hop-off bus tour to visit famous attractions like the Houses of Parliament(Palace of Westminster) , Westminster Abbey , and the London Eye .

things to do in london in 10 days

  • Consider taking a river cruise on the Thames for a different city perspective .

👉🏼Ultimate UK Itinerary 2 Weeks + Best Things To Do & Tours (England Scotland Itinerary 2 Weeks)

Day 3: Day Trip to Oxford and Cotswolds

Uk Itinerary - 10 days in UK

  • Visit famous colleges like Christ Church and the Bodleian Library.
  • In the afternoon, head to the charming Cotswolds region, known for its picturesque villages and rolling hills.
  • Explore villages like Bourton-on-the-Water or Stow-on-the-Wold.
  • Return to London for overnight stay.

👉🏼Perfect London Itinerary 7 Days – Best Things To Do, Hotels, Nightlife & Useful Tips

Day 4: London to Edinburgh

ALSO READ👉🏼: Best 5 Days In Scotland (Itinerary+Hotels+Nightlife+Vegan Food)

  • Take a morning train from London to Edinburgh (approx. 4.5 hours) or consider a short flight.
  • Arrive in Edinburgh and check into YOTEL Hotel .

UK itinerary 10 days - things to do in UK in 10 days

  • Explore the lively Grassmarket area and enjoy traditional Scottish cuisine with Scottish whiskey-tasting tours .
  • Overnight stay in Edinburgh.

Day 5: Edinburgh Sightseeing

Things to do in UK in 10 days

  • Visit the Royal Yacht Britannia, the former royal yacht of Queen Elizabeth II.
  • Attend a traditional Scottish show or enjoy live music in one of the city’s pubs.

Day 6: Day Trip to Loch Ness and Highlands

Loch Ness - uk itinerary

  • Take a guided tour to visit Loch Ness and the Scottish Highlands .
  • Enjoy the breathtaking scenery, visit the ruins of Urquhart Castle , and keep an eye out for the legendary Loch Ness Monster.
  • Explore the charming Highland villages and learn about Scottish history and folklore.
  • Return to Edinburgh for overnight stay.

Day 7: Edinburgh to York

UK in 10 days

  • Explore York’s historic city walls, visit the magnificent York Minster, and walk along the narrow medieval streets of the Shambles.
  • Visit the Jorvik Viking Centre for an interactive experience on Viking history.
  • Overnight stay in York.

👉🏼Best UK Itinerary 3 Weeks (England, Ireland, Scotland & Wales Tour)

Day 8: York to Bath

  • Take a train from York to Bath (approx. 3 hours) and check into the Z Hotel Bath .

10 days in UK

  • Explore Georgian architecture and visit landmarks like Bath Abbey and the Royal Crescent.
  • Relax in the Thermae Bath Spa, Britain’s only natural thermal spa.
  • Overnight stay in Bath.

Day 9: Bath to Stonehenge and Salisbury

  • Take a guided tour or rent a car to visit Stonehenge , a mysterious prehistoric monument (approx. 1.5 hours from Bath).
  • Explore the visitor center of Stonehenge and learn about the history and theories surrounding Stonehenge.
  • Continue to the nearby city of Salisbury and visit Salisbury Cathedral, home to the Magna Carta.
  • Return to Bath for overnight stay.

Day 10: Bath to London Departure

  • Take a train from Bath to London (approx. 1.5-2 hours
  • Arrive in London and check into your hotel.

uk in 10 days

  • Consider visiting museums like the Tate Modern or the Victoria and Albert Museum.
  • Shop at popular areas like Oxford Street or Covent Garden for souvenirs.
  • Enjoy a West End theater show or dine at one of London’s renowned restaurants in the evening.

Day 11: Departure from London

  • Check out your hotel and go to the airport for your departure from the UK.

👉Perfect Day-wise Netherlands Itinerary 7 Days – 1 Week In The Netherlands Trip Guide

Valuable Resources – UK In 10 Days

Read about some helpful things to know before you plan your UK itinerary 10 days.

City-to-City Commuting Options – UK Itinerary 10 Days

UK itinerary 10 days

  • Buses: National Express and other coach services provide affordable options for traveling between cities, though the journey times may be longer than trains.
  • Flights: Domestic flights can be quicker for longer distances or time constraints. Airlines like British Airways and EasyJet operate flights between major UK cities.

Hotel Stay Options: – UK Itinerary 10 Days

UK Itinerary 10 days

  • Edinburgh:  Look for accommodations in the Old Town or New Town areas, which are close to major sights and offer a range of options.
  • York : Stay within the city walls near attractions like York Minster and the Shambles.
  • Bath:  Choose a hotel in the city center, close to the Roman Baths and other landmarks.
  • Consider booking accommodations in advance to secure the best rates and availability.

👉🏼Best England Itinerary 7 Days – London, Oxford, Bath & Many Exciting Places Tour

Things to Do During UK In 10 Days

  • London:  Visit museums (British Museum, Natural History Museum), explore markets (Camden Market, Borough Market), enjoy a river cruise, and experience the city’s vibrant nightlife.
  • Edinburgh:  Explore the Royal Mile, hike up Arthur’s Seat, visit the National Museum of Scotland, and enjoy the Edinburgh Festival (August).

Cotswolds UK Itinerary 10 days

  • York:  Explore York Minster, walk along the city walls, visit the National Railway Museum, and take a ghost tour.
  • Bath:  Tour the Roman Baths, visit Bath Abbey, stroll along the Royal Crescent, and relax in the Thermae Bath Spa.
  • Day Trips:  Consider visiting attractions like Loch Ness and the Scottish Highlands, Stonehenge, Salisbury Cathedral, or the University town of Oxford.

Things To Do In London for Kids (UK Itinerary)

London offers a plethora of exciting and kid-friendly activities that are sure to keep children entertained and engaged. Here are some top things to do in London for kids:

  • The Natural History Museum:  Explore the dinosaur gallery, marvel at the enormous blue whale model, and discover interactive exhibits that showcase the wonders of the natural world.
  • Science Museum:  Let your kids immerse themselves in hands-on and interactive science exhibits and watch a live science show or 3D movie.
  • London Zoo:  Visit one of the world’s oldest and most renowned zoos, where children can see various animals, attend feeding sessions, and enjoy educational talks.

Harry Potter Studio Tour - Uk 10 days itinerary

  • KidZania:  Located in Westfield, London, KidZania is an interactive city designed for children to explore different careers and play in a realistic mini-city setting.
  • The Tower of London:  Experience the medieval history and intrigue at the Tower of London, where kids can learn about kings and queens, see the Crown Jewels, and even encounter the famous Beefeaters.
  • Diana Memorial Playground:  Located in Kensington Gardens, this playground is inspired by the stories of Peter Pan. It features a pirate ship, a sensory trail, and various play areas for children to enjoy.

Uk 10 days itinerary - 10 days in UK

  • The London Transport Museum:  Explore the transportation history in London through interactive exhibits, vintage vehicles, and a play zone for younger children.
  • Thames River Cruise:  Hop on a boat and cruise along the River Thames, taking in the sights of London’s iconic landmarks. Some cruises even offer special-themed tours for children.
  • The V&A Museum of Childhood:  Located in Bethnal Green, this museum showcases a collection of toys, dolls, and childhood artifacts, allowing kids to learn about the history of play.
  • Princess Diana Memorial Fountain:  Let kids cool off and have fun at this unique water feature in Hyde Park. The circular stream is perfect for splashing around on a warm day.

These are just a few examples, and London offers many more kid-friendly attractions and activities. From parks and playgrounds to theaters and interactive museums, there’s no shortage of things to do to make your visit to London memorable for the whole family.

Things To Do In the UK For Adventure Lovers

The UK is a fantastic destination for adventure lovers, offering many thrilling activities and outdoor experiences. Here are some top things to do in the UK for adventure enthusiasts:

UK Itinerary 10 days

  • Coasteering in Pembrokeshire, Wales:  Dive, climb, and jump along the rugged coastline of Pembrokeshire. Coasteering combines cliff jumping, rock scrambling, and swimming, providing an adrenaline-fueled coastal adventure.
  • Rock Climbing in Peak District, England:  The Peak District offers excellent opportunities for rock climbing, with its dramatic gritstone edges and limestone crags. Whether you’re a beginner or an experienced climber, there are routes to suit all levels.
  • Surfing in Newquay, Cornwall:  Head to the surfing capital of the UK, Newquay, where you can catch some waves and enjoy the thrill of surfing. With several surf schools and beautiful beaches, it’s a fantastic spot for beginners and experienced surfers.
  • Mountain Biking in the Lake District:  Explore the Lake District’s scenic trails and challenging routes on a mountain bike. With its varied terrain and stunning vistas, the Lake District offers a thrilling adventure for biking enthusiasts.
  • Sea Kayaking in the Scottish Isles:  Discover the remote and wild beauty of the Scottish Isles by sea kayak. Paddle through crystal-clear waters, explore sea caves, and encounter diverse marine life while enjoying the tranquility of the remote coastal landscapes.
  • Zip-lining in Snowdonia, Wales:  Soar through the skies and enjoy breathtaking views of Snowdonia National Park on a zip-line adventure. Zip World offers exhilarating experiences, including Europe’s longest zip line and the world’s first four-person zip line.

UK in 10 days

  • Caving in the Mendip Hills, England:  Explore the subterranean world of caves and underground passages in the Mendip Hills. With experienced guides, you can crawl, climb, and squeeze through fascinating cave systems.
  • Canyoning in the Brecon Beacons, Wales:  Descend waterfalls, swim through pools, and scramble across rocky terrain on a canyoning adventure in the Brecon Beacons. It’s a thrilling activity combining climbing, swimming, and sliding elements.

The UK’s diverse landscapes and natural beauty offer endless opportunities for adventure lovers to create unforgettable experiences. Enjoy these adventure sports with the guidance of experienced instructors and guides who can provide training and equipment rental. Remember to prioritize safety and ensure you have the necessary skills and equipment for each activity.

Best Time To Visit the UK

The best time to visit the UK depends on your preferences and the specific experiences you are seeking. Here’s a breakdown of the different seasons and what they offer:

  • Spring (March to May): Spring in the UK is generally mild, with blooming flowers and longer daylight hours. The countryside is lush and green, and you can enjoy outdoor activities without the peak summer crowds. It’s a great time to visit gardens like the famous Chelsea Flower Show in London.  

Uk 10 days itinerary - things to do in UK in 10 days

  • Autumn (September to November):  Autumn brings beautiful foliage and cooler temperatures to the UK. It’s an excellent time for scenic drives through the countryside, exploring national parks, and visiting historic sites. Autumn also offers cultural events like the Last Night of the Proms and the Bonfire Night celebrations on November 5th.
  • Winter (December to February):  Winter in the UK is cold, with shorter days and occasional snowfall. However, it’s a magical time to experience festive celebrations, Christmas markets, and ice skating rinks in cities like London and Edinburgh. The countryside can be particularly picturesque, especially in areas like the Scottish Highlands.

It’s important to note that the weather in the UK can be unpredictable at any time of the year, so it’s advisable to pack layers and be prepared for varying conditions. Additionally, popular attractions and cities may be busier during school holidays and major events, so plan accordingly and consider booking accommodations and tickets in advance.

Where to Find Good Vegetarian Food In the UK

There are many Indian restaurants in the UK where you can find the finest vegetarian food. And if you are looking for other cuisines, then here are some recommendations for vegetarian places to eat in the locations above:

London – 10 Days In UK

Uk 10 days itinerary - things to do in UK in 10 days

  • The Gate: Known for its innovative vegetarian and vegan cuisine, The Gate has multiple locations in London. Their menu features a fusion of flavors and includes dishes like wild mushroom risotto and beetroot tart.  
  • Vanilla Black : Located near Chancery Lane, Vanilla Black offers a sophisticated dining experience with its vegetarian and vegan tasting menus. Their inventive dishes showcase creative flavor combinations.
  • Tibits:  Situated in the heart of London, near Regent Street, Tibits is a popular vegetarian and vegan buffet-style restaurant. It offers a wide variety of fresh, seasonal dishes worldwide.

Edinburgh – 10 Days In UK

  • Henderson’s:  A longstanding vegetarian institution in Edinburgh, Henderson’s offers a range of vegetarian and vegan dishes, including hearty salads, soups, and their famous haggis.
  • David Bann:  Located in the historic Old Town, David Bann serves contemporary vegetarian and vegan cuisine with international influences. Their menu features dishes like spiced chickpea pancakes and Thai curry.
  • Holy Cow:  This vegetarian and vegan café, situated in the city center, serves delicious plant-based comfort food, including burgers, wraps, and cakes. They also have gluten-free options.
  • Paradise Palms: An eclectic vegetarian-friendly bar and café in the city center, Paradise Palms offers a relaxed atmosphere, tasty vegetarian dishes, and creative cocktails.

Bath – 10 Days In UK

  • Acorn Vegetarian Kitchen:  Located in the heart of Bath, Acorn Vegetarian Kitchen offers an exquisite dining experience with its gourmet vegetarian and vegan tasting menus featuring seasonal ingredients.
  • Beyond the Kale:  A cozy vegetarian café near Bath Abbey, Beyond the Kale serves various plant-based dishes, including salads, wraps, and smoothies. They also have gluten-free options.
  • Rooted Café:  In the city center, Rooted Café specializes in vegetarian and vegan cuisine, serving dishes like falafel wraps, Buddha bowls, and vegan cakes.
  • The Green Rocket Café:  Known for its vibrant vegetarian and vegan menu, The Green Rocket Café offers a range of dishes made with locally sourced ingredients, including breakfast options, sandwiches, and burgers.

The UK has a growing vegetarian and vegan food scene, and these recommendations should help you find delicious plant-based options during your travels.

FAQs – UK Itinerary 10 Days

Certainly! Here are some frequently asked questions for first-time visitors to the UK:

  • What currency is used in the UK, and how can I exchange money?

The currency used in the UK is the British Pound (£). You can exchange money at banks and exchange offices or use ATMs (cash machines) nationwide. Notifying your bank before traveling is an excellent way to ensure your cards work abroad.

  • What is the best way to get around the UK?

The UK has an extensive transportation network. For intercity travel, trains are often the fastest and most convenient option. Buses/coaches are also available for longer journeys. Public transportation systems like the London Underground (Tube) or buses are efficient in cities. Taxis and ride-sharing services are widely known as well.

  • Do I need a visa to visit the UK?

UK Visa depends on your nationality. Some nationalities are visa-exempt and can visit the UK for tourism purposes for a limited period. Others may require a visa. Check the UK government’s official website or contact your home country’s British embassy or consulate for up-to-date visa information.

  • What is the tipping etiquette in the UK?

Tipping is customary but only sometimes mandatory in the UK. In restaurants, a service charge may be included in the bill. If not, leaving a tip of around 10-15% is expected if you’re satisfied with the service. In bars, rounding up the bill or leaving loose change is appreciated. Tipping taxi drivers is also customary.

  • What is the weather like in the UK, and what should I pack?

The weather in the UK can be unpredictable. It’s best to pack layers to accommodate varying temperatures and occasional rain. Bring a waterproof jacket, comfortable walking shoes, and an umbrella. It’s a good idea to check the weather forecast before your trip and pack accordingly.

  • Are there any cultural etiquette or customs I should be aware of?

Queuing (waiting in line) is a cultural norm, so be patient and wait your turn. In the UK, it’s common to greet people with a handshake. British people appreciate politeness and saying “please” and “thank you.” It’s also polite to ask before taking photographs of people or religious sites.

  • What are some emergency numbers in the UK?

In emergencies, dial 999 for police, ambulance, or fire services. For non-emergency medical assistance, you can call NHS 111.

UK itinerary 10 days

Now you know the best places to visit in UK with this 10 days UK itinerary guide with hotel options, things to do, activities for all ages, and vegetarian food options. So plan your fun-filled 10 days in UK with this UK itinerary travel planner.

Download Travel Checklist to plan your UK itinerary 10 days

Download free travel checklist

Picture Courtesy – CanvaPro

Follow more on social media channels at 

Facebook       Twitter      Instagram       Pinterest

All content and photos belong to travelwithme247blog(dot)com and use of content/photos without permission would result in legal action.

DISCLAIMER  – The blog’s content is solely my views of a place or a thing. This does not offend any class, religion, ethnicity, or nation. My views can change from time to time. This blog may contain some advertisements or links to commercial products, so this site is not responsible after you click on those advertisements. 

We are the independent owner of this site, and the views expressed in this are our own. All photographs are owned by me.  There can be slight differences in distances, locations, or some details for which I (owner) am not responsible.  This post may contain some affiliate links, which means at no additional cost to you.  I will earn if you will click through affiliates and make a purchase.

Share this:

  • Click to share on Telegram (Opens in new window)
  • Click to share on Reddit (Opens in new window)
  • Click to share on Twitter (Opens in new window)
  • Click to share on WhatsApp (Opens in new window)
  • Click to email a link to a friend (Opens in new window)
  • Click to share on LinkedIn (Opens in new window)
  • Click to print (Opens in new window)
  • Click to share on Facebook (Opens in new window)
  • Click to share on Flipboard (Opens in new window)
  • Click to share on Pinterest (Opens in new window)

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

Discover more from Travel With Me 24 X 7

Subscribe now to keep reading and get access to the full archive.

Type your email…

Continue reading

two get lost logo

10 Days In England: The Ultimate Itinerary 2024

With 10 days in England, you’re going to be spoiled for choice. Known for its history, rolling green hills, and quaint country villages (and rain, but we won’t mention that!), England is a varied and vibrant country to visit.

Adam and I grew up in England, and with our passion for travel, we have spent many weekends and holidays exploring our home country. From the Yorkshire Dales to the home counties, we’ve lived and worked all over, and couldn’t wait to get down this 10 day itinerary for you all!

an english field photographed on 10 days in England

10 days in England is the perfect amount of time to get a taste of it all. From bustling city life to quiet country lanes, this 10 days in England itinerary covers it all so that you can leave knowing you got the full English experience!

yorkshire photographed on 10 days in England

  • Days 1 & 2 – London
  • Day 3 – Brighton
  • Days 4 & 5 – Bath
  • Day 6 – Bristol
  • Day 7 – Cotswolds
  • Days 8, 9 & 10 – Yorkshire

10 Days in England – Days 1 & 2

England is a country known for its rich history, beautiful countryside, and lively cities. There are plenty of things to do in England, no matter what your interests are, and with 10 days here you can cover a lot of ground.

We’ve picked out the highlights so you can plan your trip knowing you’ve seen the very best England has to offer.

London from the top of sky garden

Where better to start your 10 days in England than in the country’s vibrant capital – London. The chances are you’ll be flying into London, so it’s the perfect place to begin your trip.

London’s founding can be traced to 43 CE, when the Roman armies began their occupation of Britain. Since then, London has been an important city for England and the place of many a historic event!

You’ll find beautiful old architecture mixed with modern art, 5-star hotels alongside street food cuisine, museums and castles, and some of the best evening entertainment around. Get ready to have your senses awakened!

London skylines with two pigeons flying over

With so much to do and see here that you couldn’t possibly pack it all into only a few days. That being said, two days is enough time to see the main attractions and get a real feel for this melting pot of a city. If you only have 10 days in England then make sure a couple of them are spent seeing London’s highlights.

We’ve listed the top sights, or you can check out our detailed guide on 2 days in London for an itinerary that takes in all the city’s highlights in the best order, including the best places to eat and drink, and some top nightlife ideas too! Make sure you check the London packing guide to ensure you have everything you need for your time here.

London’s Highlights

Don’t miss:

  • Natural History Museum
  • Buckingham Palace
  • Big Ben and The Houses Of Parliament
  • Westminster Abbey
  • The London Eye ( book your tickets here )
  • Thames river boat tour
  • The Tower of London
  • Tower Bridge
  • HMS Belfast
  • St Paul’s Cathedral

tower bridge in England at dusk

Top tip: By far the cheapest way to see London’s top attractions is by buying a London Pass . For under £80 you get entry to over 80 attractions and a hop on, hop off bus ride for a day (which on its own is £40 , and totally worth it even if you don’t opt for the pass!).

Some of the popular attractions included are the View from the Shard, the Tower of London, Westminster Abbey, London Bridge Experience, Tower Bridge Exhibition, and ZSL London Zoo.

We get a small percentage if you buy through our link, but that’s honestly not why we’re recommending it here. It will genuinely save you a lot of money if you plan on visiting even a few of London’s best attractions and it’s such an easy way to know you have tickets for London’s highlights.

Where to stay in London

London is absolutely packed with great accommodation options for every budget (though you will find prices a little steeper here as with every capital!)

Here are our top picks for staying in London for the first time .

We’ve also rounded up the very best London hotels with a view and the best hotels in London with a rooftop pool if you want to make your stay here really special.

If London is too pricey then consider using Brighton (below) as your base and taking the train into London to explore instead.

  • The Walrus Bar and Hostel  – For budget travellers
  • The Z hotel in Shoreditch  – great value in an upbeat and popular part of London with good dining options
  • The Mandrake  – a beautiful boutique hotel in central London
  • The Savoy  – True luxury, with a price tag to match! This is for special stays!

10 Day Itinerary for the UK – Day 3

Head to Brighton for day 3 of your trip to the UK!

colourful houses in Brighton seen on 10 days in england

With only 10 days in England, you won’t have time to explore a lot of the south, but we would recommend taking a day trip to Brighton from London so that you can experience a typical English seaside town.

Brighton is only an hour’s train journey away from London, so it’s the perfect day trip destination! Use The Trainline  to book tickets in advance, pack a picnic and rug, and head to the beach!

Brighton is one of the UK’s most popular seaside destinations, and it has a great mix of culture, fun, beach tackiness, and old charm. There are lots of things to do here including arcade games on the pier, bike tours around the city, taking in the views from the i360, or exploring the Brighton Lanes.

Where to stay in Brighton

deckchairs in brighton

If you have longer than 10 days in London then you might want to stay in Brighton for a few nights and enjoy the party scene. Or you could do the first part of the trip in reverse and use Brighton as your base, taking the train into London to sightsee.

Snooze: Each room here is individually decorated in an interesting and quirky style in fitting with Brighton’s trendy scene. If you’re looking for something a little different then head here!

✅ Check current availability and prices

Clarence Square: This wins for location, so if you only have one night in Brighton this is a good choice. If you’re staying for longer then this has cooking facilities so you won’t have to splash out on restaurants every night.

✅ Check availability and prices here .

Top Tip: We recommend Booking.com to find the best accommodation after literally hundreds of stays with them. Make sure you read our full review of Sykes Holiday Cottages before you consider booking through them.

10 Days in England Itinerary – Days 4 & 5

Visit Bath on your 10 days in England

Bath is a UNESCO World Heritage City and well worth visiting on your 10 days in England. The architecture and history here make it one of the most beautiful cities in England and we can see why London’s Victorian gentry headed here for their holidays.

Start off your time in Bath with a walking tour (if you’ve read more of our travel guides you’ll know how much we love walking tours!) For lovers of Bridgerton, this is a must-visit destination, and you can swap your historic walking tour for a Bridgerton experience tour instead!

You should also visit the Roman Baths while you’re here, and Bath is a great shopping destination with some super cute vintage and art stores. For something a little different take a boat cruise along the River Avon and take in the city from the water.

It will take around 3 hours to get from Brighton to Bath on the train. Book your tickets in advance .

Where to stay in Bath

the cresent in Bath

Bath is a lovely place to base yourself for a few days during your trip to England. It isn’t known for being a party capital but there is plenty of nightlife in Bath, and there are also some great restaurants. The real treat about staying in Bath is the beautiful accommodation on offer.

The Kennard, stay somewhere grand: Bath was after all the go-to place for London’s elite in the Victorian era. The Kennard will certainly impress, with its grand decor and comfortable surroundings.

✅ Check availability and prices here

The Roof Terrace: Trade traditional for views with a stay in this modern apartment. It’s in the centre of Bath and has a rooftop terrace that is worthy of opening a bottle of bubbly for!

✅ Check availability and prices here.

England Travel Itinerary – Day 6

bristol suspension bridge

Bristol is one of England’s most vibrant cities and everyone who visits dreams of living here. It has a small-town feel with big-city opportunities and there are lots of interesting things to do here that are a little different from your usual city sightseeing.

One day here is enough to take in some of the most famous sights, but the real pull of Bristol is just its atmosphere. If you like the sound of Bristol you could swap your two nights in Bath for two nights here instead!

While you’re in Bristol you should visit the suspension bridge and snap away at the views, and if you’re after even more history then visit Brunel’s SS  Great  Britain. You should also keep an eye out for Bristol’s famous graffiti as you walk around the city.

One of the things we love most about Bristol is the individual shops, bars, and restaurants here, so don’t pack your day too full of activities! Make some time to eat yourself silly at a vegan cafe, or try out the much loved Jerusalem Falafel .

Where to stay in Bristol

COLOURFUL HOUSES IN BRISTOL

Hotel du Vin : The Hotel du Vin is purely luxurious, with dark wooden interiors and decadent bathtubs. In fact, a stay here might prevent you from getting out and exploring!

✅ Head here for availability and prices .

Berkeley Square BnB: If you opt for several nights in Bristol then you might want to opt for accommodation you can feel at home in. This BnB is in a great location and has all the creature comforts.

✅ Check availability and prices.

10 Days in the UK – Day 7

The cotswolds.

the cotswolds in england

The Cotswolds is a rural area of England that covers parts of 6 counties. It’s famous for its beautiful little villages, stately homes, and churches, and is a very different side of England to the larger cities. It’s well worth spending a day or two of your 10 days in England itinerary visiting some quaint villages surrounded by countryside.

pretty cottages in the cotswolds, england

There are lots of options for places to base yourself while in the Cotswolds and where ever you do end up will be gorgeous. The best things to do while you’re here are to slow down. Take a day or so to recharge by pottering around old villages, eating scones and jam in tea rooms, and visiting national trust property gardens.

10 Days in the north of England – Days 8, 9 & 10

yorkshire walks on a 10 days in england itinerary

Yorkshire is one of the most beautiful places in the north of England (in our opinion anyway!) and it’s a great place to end your 10 days in England. From here you can fly out of Manchester, which has a large airport or travel back to London to head home.

Yorkshire covers quite a wide area and there are tonnes of different things to do here to suit all tastes. Some of the best UK National Parks lie in or within easy reach of Yorkshire and are well worth your time if you love the outdoors.

We’ve listed a few ideas of places to visit depending on what you want out of the rest of your trip!

york minster

One of the most beautiful cities in the UK and a true northern city too, York is a must-visit if you’re up there. York is atmospheric and moody, with its dark stone buildings, ancient alleyways, and fascinating history. It’s one of the few places that’s still beautiful in the rain, as the cobblestones glisten and the dark skies make it more mysterious than ever.

You could easily spend the whole three days here, visiting the York dungeons , taking a candlelit cruise up the River Ooze, or taking a steam train ride through the moors . One of the best things to do here is to simply wander and take it all in.

Where To Stay In York

✅ Avondale Guest House is full of English charm and only a 10-minute walk from the center of York. It’s a great option for couples and families alike.

a couple in Haworth countryside in england

Visit Haworth for a break from city life, and experience the true charm of an English village. Haworth is home to the famous Bronte sisters, English novelists who wrote classics such as Wuthering Heights and Jane Eyre.

It’s a tiny place, little more than a cobblestone street with fascinating shops and tea rooms, but it’s the perfect place for a night away from it all and has some great walks in the surrounding areas.

Go Walking in the Moors

views over english countryside

No trip to Yorkshire would be complete without a walk or two through the breathtaking moorlands. Yorkshire is famous for its outdoor life, and the treks here are stunning.

You have a huge choice of treks to take while you’re here, but one of the most famous is the Malham Cove walk. The impressive scenery you’ll see from this hike will have you desperate for more time in the area, so it’s a great place to end your 10 days in England – planning your return!

We’ve detailed the Malham Cove walk for you, including the best places to park, the best route to take, and other important information! You’ll want to save a whole day for this hike, and you’ll need decent walking shoes and an outdoor jacket.

an english pub in yorkshire

Is 10 Days In The UK Enough?

The UK is an incredible country with so much to see and do here. You could spend a whole month exploring London alone and still not see it all.

That being said, 10 days in England is enough to see some of the best cities and areas of natural beauty and to get a real feel for the country.

Simply follow this itinerary to see the best the UK has to offer!

Conclusion: 10 Days In England

Hopefully this article has helped you plan your 10 days in England, and we’ve no doubt that you’ll have the most incredible trip! Give us a shout in the comments section below if you have any questions about travel in the UK.

If you’re after more travel inspiration and tips then follow us on social media.

winter in england

Similar Posts

Whale Watching In Mirissa, Sri Lanka

Whale Watching In Mirissa, Sri Lanka

15 Quiet Greek Islands 2024: Escape The Crowds This Summer

15 Quiet Greek Islands 2024: Escape The Crowds This Summer

Hunting Island State Park SC: The Ultimate Guide

Hunting Island State Park SC: The Ultimate Guide

How We’re Going Skiing On A Budget

How We’re Going Skiing On A Budget

7 Things You Absolutely Must Do On Your Trip To The UK In 2024

7 Things You Absolutely Must Do On Your Trip To The UK In 2024

Siurana In Spain 2024: Visiting Catalonia’s Most Beautiful Village

Siurana In Spain 2024: Visiting Catalonia’s Most Beautiful Village

One comment.

Our genetics predetermine our eyebrow shape and our eyebrows frame our face. A high arching eyebrow is often considered a desirable feature and one that many of us are not naturally born with. Cosmetic Botox can be injected strategically in a single or combination of locations around the lateral brow and forehead to either create a gentle lift or a more dramatic arch depending on your desired aesthetic look.

Comments are closed.

  • Search Search Hi! We’re Emily, Adam and Tiny Cat, liveaboard sailors travelling the world on our 38ft sailboat and writing about it as we go. We hope we can inspire you to live the life you’ve always dreamed, whether that’s exploring the world or living a more simple way of life in a tiny home. Find out more. Patreon
  • Privacy Policy

3 perfect England itineraries for every type of traveler

AnneMarie McCarthy

May 12, 2022 • 10 min read

A tourist relaxing in front of Tower Bridge, London

London is the ideal starting point for exploring England by rail or road © Franckreporter / Getty Images

Want to see as much of England as possible on your trip but don’t know where to start? Here are three of our best 7-10 day itineraries to give you some inspiration.

Each of these classic trips will give you a different insight into this green and pleasant land. But the one thing they have in common is you’ll leave with a deep appreciation of everything that makes England special: a contrast of wild and idyllic landscapes, fascinating history and captivating urban destinations.

Essential England – a 10-day itinerary

A week and a half is long enough to tick off many of England’s classic highlights. This tour takes in a dozen of the nation's top sights, from London to the Lakes.

essential england map-higher res.jpg

Day 1: Tour the streets of the capital

What better way to kickstart your perfect England itinerary than starting with a full day in the nation's vibrant capital, London ? If you only have one day to explore, simply set out on foot to admire such world-famous sights as Buckingham Palace , Tower Bridge , Trafalgar Square and more.

How to get from London to Winchester: Drive or take the train from London to Winchester; direct trains take an hour and run from Waterloo Station.

Day 2: Captivating cathedral cities

Moving southwest, you can explore one or both of the grand cathedral cities of Winchester and Salisbury . Winchester is slightly closer to London and is a history-lover’s dream with long connections to King Arthur, Sir Walter Raleigh and Alfred the Great. Another 45 minutes by road will take you to Salisbury Cathedral and one of only four surviving copies of the Magna Carta.

Go from Winchester to Bath: A hire car will open up some interesting side-trips en route to Bath. Don’t leave the area before making a detour to see the iconic megaliths of Stonehenge .

Visitors walk past the Grand Pump Room in Bath, Somerset

Day 3: A literary day in Bath

A short hop northwest leads to the beautiful city of Bath , for Roman history and fabulous Georgian architecture. For literature fans, the city has many connections to Jane Austen and, more recently, it formed the stage for Netflix’s smash hit TV series Bridgerton . 

Go from Bath to Oxford: The quickest route to Oxford is by train, connecting at Didcot Parkway. However, if you have a car and can afford a bit more time on the road, traveling by road has its benefits. You’ll be able to cruise across the classic English countryside of the Cotswolds with plenty of scenic pit stops on the way.

Day 5: Study the beauty of Oxford

An hour and a half trip by road or train will deliver you to that ancient seat of learning, Oxford . After you take in the sights and sounds of the famous university, find an idyllic English pub to cozy up in with a classic English novel.

For an optional extra day, just an hour’s drive away from Oxford is Stratford-upon-Avon . The official home of everything Shakespeare, Stratford is a pilgrimage destination for fans of the Bard and there are plenty of must-sees for anyone with an interest.

Go from Oxford to the Lake District: Circling back to London, you can pick up a direct train from Euston station that will get you to Oxenholme in the Lake District in under three hours. Alternatively, driving from Oxford to the Lakes will take you four hours.

Walker on Whiteside above Gasgale Crags in the English Lake District

Day 6 & 7: Find an outdoor paradise in the Lake District

Deservedly the most popular national park in the UK, the Lake District is a dream for outdoor enthusiasts. There are plenty of walking routes, swimming spots and cycling trails; stay the night and you can enjoy some of the country’s best stargazing.

Go from the Lake District to York: Navigate around the fringes of Yorkshire Dales National Park to York. Driving is the quickest route – otherwise expect a three-hour train journey with multiple changes available.

Day 8: Discover the delights of York

History buffs will love York for its Viking remains and stunning gothic Minster (cathedral). A medieval marvel, the highlight of the city is the Shambles , surely one of the most photographed laneways in England.

Go from York to Cambridge: The last long travel portion of this itinerary – the drive to Cambridge – will take three hours, though the train (connecting at Stevenage) will have you there slightly faster.

Punting on the River Cam by St John's College at Cambridge University

Day 9: Punt around Cambridge

Break up your trip back to the capital with a visit to learned Cambridge , England's other great university city. If the weather is good and you’re feeling energetic, rent a punt to explore The Backs of the colleges, or sit back and take a guided punt tour.

Go from Cambridge to London: From here it’s a short one-hour train journey or an hour and a half drive back to the capital.

Day 10:  Back to London

Enjoy a final day back in London, immersing yourself in galleries, museums, parks, street markets, West End shows or East End cafes – or whatever takes your fancy. Best of all, many of the top cultural experiences are free .

A hiker walking alongside Hadrians Wall near Crag Lough in Northumberland, England

The wild side of England – a 10-day itinerary

This trip is a tour through the best of England's natural landscapes, the inspiration for generations of poets, writers and composers. Put on your hiking boots as we meander through some of the country's finest national parks and open countryside.

There are several different entry points and bases to choose from for each of the parks so driving distance and public transport connections can vary. Generally, the driving distance between each point on this itinerary is between 1.5 and 2.5 hours.

Wild Side England Itinerary map

Day 1: Ramble along Hadrian’s Wall

Start at the spectacular Roman remains of Hadrian's Wall , one of England’s finest reminders of the classical era, where you can explore the ruins of Roman forts and stride, centurion-style, beside ancient ramparts.

Day 2: Unleash your inner poet in Lake District National Park

Continue into Cumbria to view the high peaks and deep lakes of the Lake District National Park. Once the spiritual home of Wordsworth and the Romantic poets, Lakeland is now a magnet for outdoor enthusiasts, with hikes for all abilities, plus cozy inns and country hotels to retreat to afterward.

Day 3: Find literary inspiration at Yorkshire Dales National Park

Traveling east from the Lakes carries you across the Pennines – the chain of hills known as 'the backbone of England' – to reach the green fells (hilltops) and dales (valleys) of the Yorkshire Dales National Park . Nearby are the dramatic moors around Emily Brontë's former home at Haworth – inspiration for Wuthering Heights .

Winnats Pass in the Peak District, UK

Day 4: Take a spa break in Peak District National Park

Travel south through the hills and dales of the Peak District National Park . Buxton makes a great base for an overnight stop – you can enjoy the town’s Thermal Spa and duck into the magnificent Poole’s Cavern . Stop off to explore the lovely parklands around Chatsworth House near Bakewell if time allows.

Day 5: Feel a natural symphony in the Cotswolds

Travel through central England, via Elgar's beloved Malvern Hills, to reach the classic English countryside of the Cotswolds . Named for its famous rolling hills, this lovely landscape is worth meandering through slowly, by car or bicycle, on foot or on horseback.

Day 6: Unravel the mysteries of Salisbury Plain

Continue southwards to enjoy the epic emptiness of Salisbury Plain, home to Stonehenge and other intriguing archaeological relics. Nearby is Avebury , England’s other great stone circle, with cozy pubs for a mid-walk pint. 

A large ammonite fossil in a beach boulder at Lyme Regis on Dorset's Jurassic Coast

Day 7: Find fossils on the Jurassic Coast

A few miles more and you're on Dorset 's spectacular fossil-ridden Jurassic Coast. There are dozens of circular walking routes to explore, and Lyme Regis makes for the perfect seaside pit stop.

Day 8: Track down wild ponies in Exmoor National Park

Head further west to take in the lush farmland of Devon and the heathery hills and sandy coves of Exmoor National Park . This otherworldly landscape is often graced by the appearance of wild ponies and deer so keep a camera to hand.

Day 9: Get uplifted on the moors of Dartmoor National Park

Onward to the eerie granite tors of Dartmoor National Park , which offer some of the country's most bleakly beautiful views. The famous mist adds to the haunting magic, although not without some navigation challenges. It’s easy to see how Dartmoor inspired Arthur Conan Doyle’s The Hound of the Baskervilles .

Day 10: Finish is cozy coves in Cornwall

Finally, enjoy the famous vistas of pretty ports, gorse-clad cliffs and sparkling bays in Cornwall . Finish this bucolic excursion at Land's End, where the English mainland finally runs out of steam and plunges headlong into the restless ocean.

Latrines at Housesteads Fort Roman ruins

Introducing Roman England – a 7-day itinerary

What did the Romans do for us? Find out on this south-to-north train trip back into England’s past, covering 572 miles (920 km) of landscapes and history.

Roman England itinerary map

Day 1: Hello Londinium

Londinium, the largest city in ancient Britannia, was a Roman creation. For an overview, start with the Museum of London ’s excellent Roman galleries, then see the remains of the 2nd-century amphitheater at Guildhall Art Gallery , the Temple of Mithras in the Bloomberg Building, and parts of the original Roman city walls just outside the exit of Tower Hill Underground station.

Go from London to Fishbourne: Take the train from Victoria Station to Fishbourne (1hr 50min).

Day 2: The villas of Fishbourne Palace

Romanized Britons built lavish country villas with all the latest mod-cons of the age, and one prime example is Fishbourne Palace near Chichester. Inside, the mosaics, especially the famous Dolphin Mosaic, are exquisite. Outside, the recreated villa gardens are the oldest in the UK.

Go from Fishbourne to Bath: Take the train from Fishbourne to Bath (3hrs).

The Roman Baths gave the town of Bath its name

Day 3: Take a bath in Bath

The Romans didn’t discover the waters at Bath, but they did build a huge bathing complex over them in the city they named Aquae Sulis. The 19th-century building over the site today contains the original Roman pools and a museum. For more modern dunking, the Thermae Bath Spa is just around the corner.

Go from Bath to Chester: Take the train from Bath to Chester (4hrs).

Day 4: Stand in the amphitheater of Chester

The amphitheater at Deva Victrix (ancient Chester ) was the largest in Britannia, built for the entertainment and training of the Roman soldiers stationed here. Excavated sections include two entrances used by performers. Nearby, in the middle of a former Roman quarry, the Minerva Shrine has a sculpture of the goddess of war and craftsmanship.

Go from Chester to York: Take the train from Chester to York (3hrs).

Day 5: Enjoy Eboracum (aka York)

When two Roman emperors die in your city and one is proclaimed there (Constantine the Great – his statue sits outside York Minster ), you’ve earned your place in Roman history. Eboracum, the Roman city of York, was founded by soldiers in 71 CE. Roman-era remnants include the remains of a basilica beneath York Minster and a bathhouse in the Roman Bath pub.

Go from York to Hadrian's Wall: Take the train to Hexham (1hr 45min).

An evening view of York with York Minster in the background

Day 6: Patrol along Hadrian’s Wall

Hadrian’s Wall was a full stop in stone, marking the northernmost limits of the expansion of the Roman Empire. Built up from 122 CE onwards, this fortified wall stretches (almost) coast to coast across northern England. Highlights include Housesteads Fort and the Vindolanda Museum with handwritten letters from Romans stationed on the wall. Connect the sites along the wall using the AD122 bus , which starts from the abbey town of Hexham.

Go from Hadrian's Wall to London: Trains run from Hexham back to London, with a change in Newcastle (from 4.5 hrs).

Day 7: Back to Londinium

Spend a final day in the capital, admiring some of the finest Roman treasures unearthed in England at the stunning British Museum . Seek out the Mildenhall Treasure – a remarkable haul of Roman silver discovered by a farmer in Suffolk in 1942.

Destination expert AnneMarie McCarthy reviewed and updated this text for accuracy and relevance. Some content has been adapted from Lonely Planet's print edition.

Explore related stories

Little red car driving near Aysgarth in the Yorkshire Dales on a sunny September day. Bolton castle seen in the far distance.

Jul 17, 2023 • 8 min read

Be inspired by these road trips across England to take a multiday drive through gorgeous landscapes, quaint villages and along epic coastlines.

IMG_20191103_140605_633.jpg

Nov 16, 2019 • 6 min read

uk trip itinerary 10 days

May 14, 2024 • 7 min read

uk trip itinerary 10 days

May 13, 2024 • 7 min read

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Apr 19, 2024 • 8 min read

Catie visited coffee shops around the city, from Abraço (second from right, top row) to Café Leon Dore (second from left, bottom row). Photographs: Catie Kelly.

Mar 22, 2024 • 9 min read

1464758942

Mar 21, 2024 • 10 min read

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Mar 17, 2024 • 10 min read

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Mar 12, 2024 • 11 min read

London, England/United Kingdom - August 25th 2019: Notting hill Carnival kids day dancers and revellers

Mar 11, 2024 • 5 min read

a packed life

Travel * Lifestyle * Planning

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary: 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit

  • Wednesday, Sep 12th, 2018

10 Day UK Itinerary

If you are thinking of traveling to the UK, you may be wondering what to include in your trip.  If you have just ten days, it’s near impossible to see everything you want to explore, and making choices is challenging.  But fear not!  We’ve put together a selection of 10 day itineraries tailored to different interests and tastes.  Here you’ll find a 10 day UK trip itinerary for you.

  • 1 10 Day UK Trip Itinerary: How Best To Enjoy It
  • 2 What Do You Want From Your UK Trip?
  • 3.1 London to Edinburgh
  • 3.2 From York to Shakespeare’s Stratford-Upon-Avon
  • 3.3 The Cotswolds, Oxford, Bath And Stonehenge
  • 4.1 Culloden and Loch Ness
  • 4.2 The Road To Skye
  • 4.3 Mallaig, Fort William and Oban
  • 4.4 Glasgow and Edinburgh
  • 5.1 Jurassic Coast
  • 5.2 Bath, Stonehenge and Avebury
  • 5.3 Walking In The Peak District
  • 5.4 Windermere And The Lake District
  • 6.1 Birmingham
  • 6.2 Hereford And The Black And White Villages
  • 6.3 Ludlow and the Shropshire Hills
  • 6.4 Shrewsbury And Chester
  • 7 Option 5:The Celtic Connection
  • 8.1 Exploring London
  • 8.2 Day Tripping From London
  • 9 How’s Your 10 Day UK Trip Itinerary Looking?

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary: How Best To Enjoy It

When I was researching this article to sift out my best recommendations, I found a variety of suggested itineraries.  One in particular had me puzzled.  In one day it featured both Cardiff and York.  Now both are fine cities, but in practice, a day like that will feature an early start, late finish and a lot of motorway services.  In my youth, I worked evenings in a hotel in Exeter.  Tour buses full of US visitors would arrive at around 7pm.  At that time, all that was left for them to do was to stroll around Cathedral Yard, taking in the Guildhall, the beautiful cathedral and Tudor Mol’s Coffee House.  Then dinner, bed and on the road again.  To my mind, that’s no way to travel.

So buckle up for our slower paced options.  There’s no doubt that some of them will involve long days.  But I’ve aimed to give you at least four hours to savour in every spot.  Real hours, not ones where all you can do is fit in a quick walk, dinner, shower and bed.  Here’s how to visit the Brits and enjoy the experience.

Getting Ready To Plan Your UK Trip?  Why Not Pin This For Later!

uk trip itinerary 10 days

What Do You Want From Your UK Trip?

The starting point for your itinerary is always going to depend on your preferences.  For that reason, I’ve put together a number of different itineraries based on some common interests.  You’ll notice that some destinations tick many boxes.  That’s great if you are traveling as a group with different interests.  You can pick and mix to your heart’s content.

I’ve also made different itineraries for different styles of travel.  If spending hours on the road makes your bones crunchy, and the stress of driving on a different side of the road is a chore, then there are choices here for you.  We’ve checked out  the best way to find affordable public transport in the UK too.

Do you like to get under the skin of fewer places, or skim the surface of all the best things?  Both options are entirely feasible.  So let me set out the buffet of tasty UK treats for your 10 day itinerary.

Option 1: UK’s Greatest Hits: A Fast Paced Trip To The Most Visited Places

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Oxford

London, Edinburgh, York, Stratford-upon-Avon, the Cotswolds, Oxford, Bath & Stonehenge

Chosen from the cities and sites most loved by overseas visitors, this itinerary will have you taking in a broad sweep of the UK.  You won’t get much rest on this trip, but I promise you’ll see a lot of the highlights.  Consider this a box of chocolates from which you’ve picked your favourites and had to leave the rest.

London to Edinburgh

Having flown in to London, the first night sees you taking the overnight sleeper train from London Euston to Edinburgh Waverley , an experience in itself.  Don’t forget your neeps and tatties for dinner.  Arriving bright and early at breakfast, there’s time to visit Edinburgh Castle, wander Princes Street and the Royal Mile and explore Holyrood Palace.

From York to Shakespeare’s Stratford-Upon-Avon

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - York

On the morning of Day 3, take the train to York (around two and a half hours).  You’ve got time to meander The Shambles, investigate the old city walls and York Minster and check out the railway museum.  You might want to fit in a very English afternoon tea at Betty’s.  On the morning of Day 4, pick up your hire car for your journey to Stratford-Upon-Avon.  You should be there by lunch time, ready to explore Shakespeare’s Birthplace and the rest of the Tudor town.

The Cotswolds, Oxford, Bath And Stonehenge

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Stonehenge

Day 5 is a short drive out to the Cotswolds via Shipston-on-Stour; I’m recommending Broadway with its Tower and the beautiful Stow-on-the-Wold.  Day 6 has you driving south to Oxford, legendary city of dreaming spires.  If you’re feeling brave, take a punt (a flat bottomed boat) out on the river.  On day 7, you’re heading south to Bath, home to the legendary Spa, and a lot of beautiful Regency architecture.  Early the next morning, catch Stonehenge at its most beautful, then spend the rest of day 8, heading back to London for your final two days in the capital.

Option 2: Touring Scotland The Brave

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Edinburgh

Inverness, Isle of Skye, Fort William, Oban, Glasgow, Edinburgh

This is a trip for the most avid of scenery lovers.  For this trip, you can either fly in to the first and last cities, or let the train rock you gently on the overnight sleeper from London to Scotland and back.  If you’ve taken the overnight sleeper from London on Day 1, you’ll be in Inverness by early morning.  Spend the morning of that second day exploring the city, including its castle and cathedral.

Culloden and Loch Ness

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Urqhart Castle, Loch Ness

On the afternoon of Day 2, pick up your hire car, and head off to Culloden to explore the historic battlefield and find the real flavour of Scottish history.   On Day 3 you’re on the trail of the legendary Nessie at Loch Ness.  If you want to drive all the way round the Loch, we’re talking 67 miles, so make your choices of a whole circuit or selected highlights.

The Road To Skye

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Isle of Skye

On Day 4, it’s time to take the road to the Isle of Skye.  Don’t hurry this journey, as it’s truly one of the most beautiful to be had, traveling over the sea to Skye.  You’ll want to spend time at Kyle of Lochalsh on the way,  meeting the brooding and beautiful Eilean Donan Castle.

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Eilean Donan

Mallaig, Fort William and Oban

On Day 5, it’s time to meander back to Mallaig, visiting Loch Morar and Loch Nevis.   Then onwards to Fort William, where you can take the Jacobite steam train as featured in the Harry Potter films.   Day 6 is for exploring Oban and its historic distillery, plus the War and Peace museum.

Glasgow and Edinburgh

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Glasgow Kelvingrove

Day 7 of this 10 day UK trip itinerary features a drive back to Glasgow, where you can return the hire car.  The city is famed for its Victorian and Art Nouveau architecture, and is home to a lot of Scotland’s cultural institutions.  At whatever point you wish, catch the train to Edinburgh (taking around an hour) and spend the last part of your tour there.  Visit Edinburgh Castle and Arthur’s Seat, explore Holyrood House, and maybe have dinner in the Cafe Royal.  On the night of Day 9, it’s time to board the sleeper train for London.

Option 3: The UK’s Big Outdoors

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Avebury

Stonehenge and Avebury, the Jurassic Coast, the Peak District, and the Lake District

If your heart is made glad by big open spaces, this is the itinerary for you.  To make the most of this itinerary, it is best to drive, giving you the greatest amount of time in each spot.

Jurassic Coast

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Durdle Door

On your first day, pick up your hire car and head west to Dorset and the Jurassic Coast.  Visit the UNESCO World Heritage Site at Durdle Door, a natural rock formation.  Man O’War beach next door is also spectacular.  You have two days here to explore.

Bath, Stonehenge and Avebury

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Bath

On the morning of Day 3, you’re on the road to Bath, enjoying the spa town that afternoon and evening.  Early next morning, you’re heading out to explore Stonehenge first, then Avebury, so see some of the UK’s most talked about sites.  Book your overnight stay in the glorious countryside here.

Walking In The Peak District

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Peak District

On the morning of Day 5, it’s time to drive north.  You’re heading to the Peak District, one of the UK’s National Parks.  Don’t forget to stop off in Bakewell, the famed home of the Bakewell Tart and the Bakewell Pudding, and a charming town in its own right.  You’ve got two days to explore here, maybe taking in walks on Mam Tor or visiting Kinder Scout.

Windermere And The Lake District

25 Stunning Places To Visit In The Lake District - Windermere

After breakfast on Day 7, you’re driving north west to enjoy the beauty of the Lake District, surely one of the highlights of this 10 day UK trip itinerary.  Take a steamer on England’s biggest lake, Windermere, or climb its highest peak at Scaffell Pike.  Late on day 9 or early on day 10, drop off your hire car in Carlisle, and then let the train take you back to the bustle of London on your last day.

Option 4: The UK’s Best Kept Secrets

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Birmingham

Birmingham, Hereford, the Welsh Marches, Shrewsbury, Chester

If you’ve already visited the UK before and seen many of its famed attractions, maybe you’re looking for something a little different.  Walk this way!

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Birmingham

Either fly direct or catch the train to Birmingham , England’s second biggest city.  Described as the city of a thousand trades, Birmingham is packed with Victorian architecture and a vibrant cultural pulse.  Your two days here are spend exploring and maybe taking the Tolkien Trail to see The Shire, inspiration for one of Birmingham’s most famous residents.

Hereford And The Black And White Villages

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Hereford

Pick up your hire car on the morning of Day 3 and it’s a gentle 90 minute drive to Hereford, maybe stopping off en route to enjoy the Malvern Hills.  Hereford’s cathedral is home to the Mappa Mundi, one of the oldest traveler’s maps in the world.  Also here you’ll find the Cider Museum, a tudor museum in the Old House and a lot of winding streets to explore.  On Day 4, you’re heading into the countryside on the Black and White Village Trail, full of timbered and half-timbered houses.  Spend that night in Ludlow, centre of the Welsh Marches and once the capital of Wales.

Ludlow and the Shropshire Hills

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Ludlow

When you wake up refreshed on Day 5, you’ve got time to explore its Castle, once home to the Princes in the Tower.  Ludlow is a fine foodie destination, so be sure to enjoy all it has to offer.  Day 6 of this 10 day UK trip itinerary sees you heading north to appreciate the beauty of the Shropshire Hills.  Church Stretton is your point to access these walks, and you can also go hang-gliding or gliding here.

Shrewsbury And Chester

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Chester Roman Wall

Day 7 is for Shrewsbury , the historic border town on the River Severn with a Welsh bridge and an English bridge.  Explore the fascinating narrow streets or shuts, take a boat trip or wander the cathedral.  On Day 8, you’re heading north again to Chester.  The city walls here are well worth exploring and the narrow shopping streets with “upstairs and downstairs shops”.  On your last day, drive back to Birmingham and drop off your car, ready for your flight home.

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit

Option 5:The Celtic Connection

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Cardiff

London, Edinburgh, Belfast, Cardiff

If you want your trip to cover all of the United Kingdom, then you’ve got time to country hop in 10 days.  There are many ways to put this itinerary together, so I’ve worked out my preferred option.  Here’s how to visit England and Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland in 10 days.

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Belfast

On Day 1, you’ve got a flight from London to Belfast.  Here you’ve got the Titanic Museum, Carrickfergus Castle, Ulster Hall for music and W5 Science Centre to entertain you.  Fly across to Edinburgh on Day 3 of this 10 day UK itinerary, where you have until the Day 5 to take your fill of the Royal Mile, Edinburgh Castle and the Royal Yacht Britannia at Leith.

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Norwegian Church, Cardiff Bay

On Day 6, it’s time for your flight to Cardiff.  Check out the castle, the numerous beautiful Victorian arcades, and the sweet Norwegian Church on the waterfront at Cardiff Bay.   On Day 8, take the train back from Cardiff to London, a two hour trip.  It gives you a chance to see some of the countryside on your way to the capital.  All the charms of London are then before you until your flight home.

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit

And A Final Bonus Option: London and Beyond

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Houses of Parliament

London with side trips to Canterbury, Brighton, Lincoln, Oxford and Birmingham

If the thought of packing and unpacking every night really doesn’t appeal, then I’ve got an alternative for you.  This itinerary means that you stay in one place, simply day tripping your way to some alternative destinations for a day at a time.  In between each trip, you get a day to explore London at your leisure.

Exploring London

I’d recommend choosing an area of London to explore on each of your 5 days there, and seeking out the attractions of that particular location on the day.  For example, choose Greenwich for a day for the Cutty Sark and the Royal Observatory.  Choose Southbank for Tower Bridge, walking the Thames and The Shard .

Day Tripping From London

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit - Brighton Royal Pavillion

In between you get to go day tripping.  I’ve recommended Canterbury, crammed with history, and a very walkable city.  There are the seaside treats of Brighton , with its pier and the opulent Royal Pavilion.  Birmingham has shopping to rival London, but on a much more compact scale.  Lincoln is woefully underrated, with its fine cathedral and one of the few copies of the Magna Carta.  And who could miss Oxford, legendary city of dreaming spires and with flavours of Hogwarts if you have Potterheads in your group.  All of these day trips are no more than an hour and a half on the train from London, giving you plenty of time to explore as part of your 10 day UK trip itinerary.  We’ve collected up more alternative day trips from London here.

How’s Your 10 Day UK Trip Itinerary Looking?

Has our UK trip planner been useful? Have we found all your favourite spots?  Added any new ones?  If you don’t have 10 days to spare, why not check out our recommended top 10 UK city breaks .    If you want more inspiration on places to enjoy in England, then check out these recommendations for Essentially English Experiences from some of our favourite travel writers.  If you’d like to delve a little deeper into new place to explore, I’ve shared some of my favourite hidden gems in England .

Planning Your UK Trip?  Pin This For Later!

10 Day UK Trip Itinerary - 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit

Author: Bernie

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

I accept the Privacy Policy

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

19 thoughts on “ 10 Day UK Trip Itinerary: 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit ”

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Wow wish I could spend 10 days in the UK!

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Hey, what a great post, you have really picked some great options for travelling within the U.K. Edinburgh is one of my favourite cities and I’m glad it made it on to your list, however I’m a bit sad that Liverpool never made it, one of the best cities in England!

uk trip itinerary 10 days

I was so tempted by Liverpool, what with the Maritime Museum, and the fantastically decorated Philharmonic pub with mermaids and mermen. Plus the Gormleys all looking out to sea at Crosby. I wonder if I can sneak it in…

uk trip itinerary 10 days

All these itineraries sound amazing, especially the Scotland one! I would love to visit Edinburgh and Glasgow so thanks of all the travel inspiration! And all those pictures look stunning! 🙂

The Scotland one is based on a trip we did a while back, and I’d so love to do it again. I still remember that moment we headed across to Skye and the car went silent as we appreciated all that beauty before us.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Wow, love all the different options! Especially the Big OUtdoors and scenic Scotland ones. I did a 10-day just England trip last year. Spent 4 days in London and felt like we hardly scratched the surface!

The Big Outdoors really is lovely – so many treats for the eyes and all the rest of the senses. I need to get back to Scotland too.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Over a decade ago, two of my daughters and myself spent a week backpacking through the UK. We loved it! So much so that it sparked a hiking bug and two of us have since climbed many mountains, including Kilimanjaro! We hiked through Bath and Wells and fount the UK countryside to be quite beautiful. Thank you for a trip down memory lane with your photos of the areas we visited.

You picked some beautiful places! I remember going to see the comedy Hot Fuzz at the cinema and being totally frustrated at recognising its setting but not being able to place it. We had to Google as soon as we got out. Wells, of course!

uk trip itinerary 10 days

This is a lovely itinerary! If my visa wasn’t rejected I would have been to UK already 🙁 Anyway saving it for the future trip to UK

uk trip itinerary 10 days

I live in London and your posts inspired me to travel more in the UK. I have been to many of your suggested places (but I am sure I will go back again) but I have never done my way to the Isle of Sky. Thanks for the great ideas and I will use your suggestions for planning a nice trip up there.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Thank you for the inspiration you’ve provided 🙂 I would visit for 2 weeks to start, leaving lots of time to hikes in Scotland and ancient sites!

Bonus days! Hiking in Scotland is a massive treat for sure.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

I haven’t yet been to the UK, but, wow, it looks like there is really a lot to see. And so much nature. While most of people visit only cities.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

I’ve been in UK last year but for business purposes. I’ll be back and will see those places myself!

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Thanks, dor sharing some important information about UK That I had never been visited my plans to the UK are still On-going hope to travel this month of August Meanwhile I will bookmark this page as this will be so helpful for my travel trips!

I do hope you can make it here in August. It will be a great time to explore, and you have so many choices to make about where to visit. Glad to be of help!

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Is it possible to do any of these itineraries using only public transport? We have never driven on the left side of the road and are not sure we want to.

That’s a definite yes! Some will be easier than others, so I might suggest a couple of modifications. The bonus option – London and beyond – sees you day tripping out of London, and that is really easy to achieve by train. Have a look at some of the suggestions here for day trips from London: https://apackedlife.com/the-13-best-alternative-day-trips-from-london/ . You could manage anywhere from Cardiff to Oxford or Brighton – even Manchester if you were happy spending a little longer on the train. If you don’t want to haul luggage, you’d be able to store some of it in London and just take an overnight bag to make for some overnighters.

To get a flavour of the Celtic Connection (Option 5), it’s easy to fly to Belfast if you wish or fly/take the overnight sleeper train to Inverness. From Inverness you could make your way on the train to Edinburgh, rich in heritage, then continue your journey down the east coast to York for Vikings, and the magnificent Shambles before returning to London. You can reach Cardiff in around 2 hours from London by train (London Paddington) and that opens up more routes into Wales for further exploration… even up the coast to take a ferry to Ireland if that sounds good to you.

Option 4 – which I called best kept secrets – is really easy by train. Head straight to Birmingham by rail from either London Euston or London Marylebone. You have local train services which will take you to Hereford, Shrewsbury and Ludlow from there. The Welsh Marches train line runs from Shrewsbury to Hereford and there are lots of fascinating places served by small stations on the way. I’d highly recommend pretty Ludlow, full of foodie treats and with stunning architecture.

If there’s anything else I can help with, do let me know. I don’t drive due to an eye condition, so I’m always looking for public transport options.

tosomeplacenew

10 days in United Kingdom UK Itinerary | England, Wales & Scotland

Love it? Share it!

Planning to spend 10 days in United Kingdom? No worries – our comprehensive travel guide covers everything you need to know for your upcoming UK itinerary. This is a jam-packed sightseeing itinerary and it can be done with or without a rental car. 

Through this 10 itinerary for the United Kingdom, you will be able to explore Scotland’s rugged Highlands and majestic castles, England’s charming villages and picturesque countryside, and a day trip to Cardiff, Wales. 

Whether it’s your first time visiting or you are returning to old favorites, you will find our UK itinerary super useful! 

10 days in United Kingdom UK Itinerary

10 days in UK itinerary pin

Disclosure: This post contains affiliate links. If you click one of them, we may receive a small commission at no extra cost to you.

When you visit the UK you will be checking off the following – England, Wales, and Scotland with the possibility of extending the trip to Northern Ireland. 

United Kingdom Itinerary 10 days | At a glance

Here is a snapshot of what you will be exploring in 10 days

  • Day 1 – 3 : London and Windsor
  • Day 4 : Wales day trip
  • Day 5 – 6 : Cotswolds
  • Day 7 : Edinburgh 
  • Day 8 – 10 : Scottish Highlands and Beyond

10 days in UK itinerary illustrated map

Getting to the United Kingdom

London is the largest city and the best point of entry to the United Kingdom from North America. We flew from Toronto Canada to London Gatwick and the flights were non-stop and comfortable! 

Wherever you are located, getting to London is easy, thanks to the United Kingdom’s excellent transportation network. By air, Heathrow Airport is the main gateway for international travelers and offers direct flights from many destinations around the world. 

From Heathrow or Gatwick , you can take a bus, taxi, or train into central London and explore the city quickly and easily. We booked a coach ride with National Express , and it was super convenient with our luggage. 

If you’re coming from Europe, the Eurostar Train service offers direct access to London from Paris and Brussels. This comfortable train ride takes just over two hours and arrives at St Pancras International Station in central London. 

Alternatively, you can drive to London in your own car or hire a rental vehicle. 

If you are not renting a car, coach rides are very affordable and comfortable to get you to various destinations in the UK. And train travel, of course. 

Once you arrive in the city of London, you can use the excellent public transport network — buses, trains, and the famous Tube that provides fast access to all areas of the capital.

Accommodation and sightseeing

For the purposes of this 10-day UK itinerary, you will stay overnight in a few places. Starting with London – exploring the city, Windsor, taking a day trip to Cardiff, followed by a stay in the Cotswolds. 

You can also keep London as a base and instead of staying overnight in the Cotswolds, you can visit 3 villages in one day, and spend another day in the English city of Bath.

From London, make your way to Scotland. You can take an overnight coach from London Victoria to Edinburgh, and keep Edinburgh as a base for the remainder of your trip. Additionally, you can explore the Scottish Highlands and nearby. 

From vibrant cities like London, Edinburgh, and Bath to picturesque landscapes in the Cotswolds and the Scottish Highlands, here is the perfect 10-day UK itinerary for you. 

Day 1 – 3 of United Kingdom Itinerary 10 days: London and Windsor

Start your 10 day United Kingdom itinerary with a bang by exploring the vibrant city of London. Take in top attractions such as Buckingham Palace, Tower Bridge, and Westminster Abbey. 

Where to stay in London for the next 3 days: 

  • Sidney Hotel Victoria: Stay at this no-frills but wonderful hotel in the heart of London, near the Victoria Coach and train station. The location is perfect to get to various attractions such as Buckingham Palace, James Park, and restaurants. Click to view hotel room availability here
  • Club Quarters Hotel Trafalgar Square: This is a nice 4-star property located near Trafalgar Square. It is perfect as you are in the midst of tons of shopping, and fun dining options. You can also walk to many museums as well as Buckingham Palace. Click to view photos and availability
  • JW Marriott Grosvenor Square: This luxury Marriott property is only a few minutes away from many tube stations and Bond Street. It is located in the Mayfair area with great access to sightseeing and restaurants. Book your stay here

Day 1 of UK Itinerary: London and around

Start your London adventure with a visit to Buckingham Palace , the official residence of the British monarchy. 

First off, set aside 45 minutes to view the Changing of the Guard ceremony. It is perfect to do so in the morning, or after the crowds disperse, as it is a little calmer and quieter.  

Note that the Changing of the Guard takes place daily in the summer but only on Monday, Wednesday, Friday, and Sunday in winter. 

It gets called off on occasion so check the timings before you go. You can book a Changing of the Guard tour here

Saint James Park

From the Buckingham Palace, make your way to Saint James Park. This green oasis in the heart of the city is perfect for a nice stroll. 

In the warmer months, you can see flowers blooming everywhere. There is a cafe on-site where you can enjoy some drinks or a break for a quick bite before moving on to the next attraction. 

Kensington Palace and Gardens

In the afternoon, head to the area around Kensington Gardens. Located in Kensington Gardens is the palace of the same name that has been a royal residence since the 17th century. 

Today, it is open to the public and houses a number of historic artifacts and works of art. It is one of the most popular tourist destinations in London. 

We recommend buying a ticket to visit the state rooms. They are open to the public from 10:00 am to 5:00 pm. Although entry is £20 for adults , it is free for London Pass holders.

Royal Albert Hall

A walk across the palace gardens will bring you to the Royal Albert Hall , inaugurated by Queen Victoria in 1871 in memory of her husband Albert. 

From movie screenings and the annual Proms to tennis matches, there is always something going on here. Plus entry is free for London Pass holders.

You can book a show for the evening, and then call it a day. Or head to Hyde Park for a sunset stroll. 

Hyde Park is one of the largest parks in central London and one of the Royal Parks of England. It covers an area of 342 hectares (843 acres) and is the largest of four parks that form a continuous chain along the north side of the River Thames.

It is located next to the Kensington Gardens, and the access is free. The gardens are always busy with visitors and locals enjoying a walk, picnic, or jog almost all the time. 

You can also enjoy the Serpentine Gallery, a contemporary art gallery housed in a converted tea pavilion; the Princess Diana Memorial Fountain; the Albert Memorial; and the Serpentine Lake, located at Hyde Park.

Boating is also possible at The Serpentine. It is open from April until October 31st, from 10 a.m. to around 4 p.m. (during the winter) and 10 a.m. to 8 p.m. (during the summer).

Day 2 of UK Itinerary: London and around

Set aside day 2 of the United Kingdom itinerary for museum hopping. If you are not into history and museums, you can combine 1 museum visit + shopping + casual attractions.

We recommend opting for a hop on and hop off tour so that you can check off all the spots with ease. 

If walking from London Victoria, you can make your way to the south bank of the River Thames from the National Gallery to see three of the most iconic landmarks of the city –  Big Ben, the Houses of Parliament, and the Gothic building of the Westminster Abbey, the site of the country’s coronation church since 1066.

Big Ben and the Houses of Parliament

Big Ben is an iconic London landmark that you won’t want to miss. On our trip, we were able to see it, in all its glory without any scaffolding. 

Take a walk around the clock tower and marvel at its beauty. It makes for a nice photo spot in London as well. 

The Houses of Parliament is the seat of the British government, and it’s definitely worth a visit. You can take a tour of the Houses of Parliament, or simply admire the architecture from the outside. 

Read : 4 days in London itinerary

Westminster Abbey

Westminster Abbey is one of the most famous churches in the world, and it’s only a 3-minute walk from the Houses of Parliament. 

The abbey is a Gothic church and a well-known UNESCO World Heritage Site in London. Take the time to visit the interiors and admire the beautiful architecture including the stained glass windows. 

You will need to book an entrance ticket for Westminster Abbey, and it is free with the London Pass.

Did you know that Westminister Abbey has been the coronation church of the British monarchy since the 11th century? And this is where Kate and William got married! 🙂 

Churchill War Rooms

After sightseeing here, make your way to Churchill War Rooms. It was an easy visit as the museum is on the way from here to Big Ben and back. 

The War Rooms had been on my bucket list for a while. Both Salil and I loved WWI and WWII history, and if you do too, then you must visit this museum. 

Here is a walking tour of the area, along with the entrance ticket for the Churchill War Rooms. 10 Downing Street is also located nearby.

From the War Rooms, make your way to the Natural History Museum and the Victoria and Albert Museum (for history buffs)

Natural History Museum

Natural History Museum is one of the must-see attractions in London, and it is completely free to explore. The museum is home to over 80 million specimens, including dinosaurs, animals, rocks, and minerals. 

Victoria and Albert Museum

Next, visit the Victoria and Albert Museum nearby. 

Victoria and Albert Museum is the United Kingdom’s popular art museum, with one of the world’s most comprehensive and significant collections of Chinese art, as well as one of the West’s largest. 

They are open every day from 10:00 am to 5:45 pm, with late opening on Fridays until 10:00 pm. Admission is free, although there may be charges for special exhibitions.

After museums, stop at a cute and Instagrammable cafe – EL&N . It is all pretty in pink, and they serve brunch, light lunch, and coffee! The nearest tube is South Kensington. 

If you wish to shop, this area has a lot of options. Or you can make your way to Piccadilly Circus and then to Leicester Square for some retail therapy. 

Piccadilly Circus

Piccadilly Circus, a vibrant square is always buzzing with activity, day or night. You can catch a show at the world-famous theater (for evening activity), do some shopping at one of the many nearby stores, or just hang out. 

Leicester Square

A short walk from Piccadilly is Leicester Square, the area noted for movie premiers in London. It is not only known for its theater shows but also for food joints and shopping. 

This area is also close to Chinatown and Covent Garden (see London is very walkable), and you can take your pick for dining! 

Day 3 of UK Itinerary: Windsor and London

Take a journey outside of London to Windsor Castle , one of the official residences of Her Majesty Queen Elizabeth II. Explore its grounds, marvel at the architecture, and learn about its rich history. 

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Afterward, take a peaceful stroll in Windsor Great Park before returning to London in the afternoon. 

Tower Bridge

Get to the Tower Bridge as soon as you arrive in London. Walk across the bridge to get stunning photos and views of HMS Belfast (a WWII ship now converted into a museum). 

There are a lot of places to take photos of the Bridge – from either side of the river, near the Shard, outside where cruises leave, or from the Tower of London entrance areas. 

Note that you can access the top of the Tower Bridge, and even walk on the glass floor and enjoy an exhibition after. These exhibits will provide an insight into the fascinating history of this impressive structure. 

Tower of London

Near the bridge is the Tower of London, the place where many infamous prisoners were publicly executed. The tower is home to the Crown Jewels and a vast variety of other gemstones. 

Remember to book tickets in advance, (included in the London Pass ) and keep at least two hours in the afternoon to see all the main sights. 

Try to get all the sightseeing done before 6:00 pm so that you can enjoy a lovely Thames cruise after. 

Another option is to head to the Sky Garden instead of the cruise. A 10 minute walk from the Tower will bring you to Sky Garden. Entry is free (but you have to book a slot beforehand) and this landmark structure offers epic views of the city. 

Other attractions in London

We did skip a few spots from this itinerary to accommodate iconic landmarks in London. However, here are some more ideas for you to consider. 

  • London Eye: Across River Thames is the London Eye or the Millennium Wheel. This is a great spot to soak in 360° views of London. Buy your fast-track tickets for the London Eye here
  • Afternoon tea cruise on River Thames: We really enjoyed our afternoon tea cruise on River Thames. It was a great way to check out all the city highlights. The tour lasts 2 hours and includes tea and snacks. You can book a spot online here
  • Imperial War Museum: This is a free museum, and has permanent exhibitions from the World Wars and other present-day conflict exhibits
  • The National Gallery : The National Gallery is home to many masterpieces of art from the 13th to the 19th centuries
  • Borough Market: London’s most renowned food market, Borough Market is a must-visit for any foodie. With over 100 stalls selling everything from fresh produce to artisan cheese and meats, you’ll be spoilt for choice. It is located near the London Tower
  • Covent Garden
  • Oxford Street shopping

Day 4 of United Kingdom 10 day itinerary: Cardiff Wales day trip from London

Spend your fourth day of your 10 day United Kingdom itinerary exploring the Welsh capital city of Cardiff. Located just two hours from London by train, this vibrant city is full of life and has something for everyone to enjoy.

You can also drive to Cardiff, or ride a coach, however, it will take longer – about 3.50 hours by bus. Once you arrive in Cardiff, start exploring!

Cardiff Castle

First, take a journey back in time to Cardiff Castle. This is a medieval castle that dates back over 2000 years. It is believed that the was built in the late 11th century by Norman invaders on top of a 3rd-century Roman fort.

With a ticket, you can visit the Interpretation Centre, and enjoy a tour of the Castle Apartments and the Norman Keep. At the complex, you can also walk the pathways around the Castle Battlements, see the Wartime Shelters, and the Firing Line/Cardiff Castle Museum of the Welsh Soldier. 

Cardiff Castle is a big complex, and you can also enjoy a lovely walk in and around the site and/or picnic on the grounds. 

Read : One Day in Cardiff Itinerary

Cardiff Arcades

When ready for a break, you can stop at a cafe right outside the Castle, or hit the Cardiff Arcades. 

Here you can sample traditional Welsh cuisines such as Welsh Rarebit, cawl, and bara brith. Or try some authentic dishes from around the world like Indian curry and Chinese dim sum.

We enjoyed our beer and snacks before moving on. 

National Museum Cardiff

Next, visit the National Museum Cardiff. You can see exhibits from evolution like meteorites, moon rocks, dinosaurs, and wooly mammoths. There are also natural history galleries that showcase animals, birds, and insects from Wales and beyond. 

Cardiff Parks

There are amazing parks and gardens where you can hang out and enjoy the weather! Our favorites include – Sophia Gardens, Alexandra Gardens, and the Gorsedd Gardens (located near the National Museum). 

Cardiff Bay

In the late afternoon, take a ride on the iconic Millennium Water Taxi from Mermaid Quay to Penarth Marina to enjoy the Bay of Cardiff. 

If you are in town for longer, you can also enjoy a walk around the city centre at night to marvel at its illuminated buildings and streets. Cardiff is alive with energy as locals enjoy late-night drinks at pubs and bars. 

To complete your trip to Cardiff, grab a craft beer from one of the many popular breweries and explore the vibrant nightlife that this Welsh capital has to offer.

Day 5 – 6 of United Kingdom Itinerary 10 days: Cotswolds

Spend two days of your 10 day United Kingdom itinerary exploring the picturesque Cotswolds region. This beautiful area of England is made up of charming towns and villages, rolling hills, and exquisite country estates. 

Also visit the nearby charming towns of Bath, Oxford, and Stratford-upon-Avon. In our experience you can easily spend half a day to a full day in each, but for the purposes of this fast paced itinerary consider quick sightseeing here, except for the Roman Baths (in Bath) and/or Blenheim Palace (if you stop here) – where you will need atleast an hour each.

Tip: If you prefer to keep London as a base, you can book a day tour to the Cotswolds (covering 3 villages) , and set aside a second day to visit Stonehenge

Start in the city of Bath where you can explore its unique Roman-era baths and take a stroll around its charming streets. 

Visit the famous Circus and the Royal Crescent, then take a boat tour (if time permits – 1 hour) along the River Avon to admire views of this stunning city.

Next, head to Oxford and visit some of its iconic colleges including Christ Church College and The University Church of St Mary the Virgin. 

Take a walking tour around the city centre and explore its cobbled streets, bookshops, and quirky cafes. 

If interested you can skip the next stop, and instead visit Blenheim Palace near Oxfordshire. 

Stratford-upon-Avon

In the afternoon, visit Stratford-upon-Avon to explore its many historic attractions including Shakespeare’s Birthplace, Anne Hathaway’s Cottage, and Bancoft’s Gardens. 

Bourton-on-the-Water

Continue on to Bourton-on-the-Water which is often referred to as the ‘Venice of the Cotswolds’. Enjoy a peaceful stroll in the evening around its quaint canals and catch a glimpse of its impressive bridges.

Stay here overnight and then continue sightseeing in the Cotswolds the next day.

Hotels in Bourton-on-the-Water

  • Old Manse Hotel: This is a cozy hotel in the heart of Bourton-on-the-Water to sleep for 1-2 nights. They offer free parking if you are road tripping, and are pet friendly. If you are not driving, the hotel is near public transit. Book your room here
  • Chestnut Bed and Breakfast: Enjoy a good location, free breakfast, and parking at the Chestnut Bed and Breakfast. This hotel is housed in a 300 year old building, with many suites offering river views. Click to view availability here

Day 6 of UK itinerary: More of the Cotswolds 

Spend one more day exploring the charming villages of the Cotswolds on your 10 day United Kingdom itinerary. From castle ruins and churches to quaint cobbled streets and beautiful gardens, you’ll be spoilt for choice with places to visit.

Read: Cotswolds itinerary 3 days

Castle Combe

Start your day with a visit to Castle Combe, one of the prettiest villages in England. Once a fortified castle and later a thriving wool trading centre, today it is best known for its picturesque streets lined with thatched cottages and historic buildings.

Next, head to the village of Bibury where you can admire some fine examples of traditional Cotswold architecture as well as some of the prettiest cottages in the area. 

Visit Arlington Row, a terrace of weavers’ cottages dating back to the 14th century, and take a stroll around its beautiful village green.

Stow-on-the-Wold

Continue on to Stow-on-the-Wold where you can explore St Edward’s church with its impressive spire and many monuments. Take a stroll around the village square where you can find some unique shops and cafes.

End your day with a visit to Burford, one of the most picturesque villages in the Cotswolds. Admire the beautiful buildings such as St John’s church which dates back to the 13th century. 

Take a stroll along the river Windrush and admire views of the surrounding countryside before heading back to London with a break in Oxford, for an overnight stay.

Tip: Start for Edinburgh overnight by coach, or drive there the next day. You can be quite flexible for the remainder of your 4 days in Scotland itinerary . 

Day 7 of United Kingdom Itinerary 10 days: Edinburgh

Head up to Scotland and explore the city of Edinburgh for 1 day. Soak in the stunning architecture, take a stroll through Princes Street Gardens, and visit attractions such as Edinburgh Castle and St Giles’ Cathedral.  

Depending on your day and time of arrival you can use the 8th day to explore Edinburgh. 

We traveled by overnight bus and arrived in the morning, and spend 3 days in Edinburgh, on one of our extended trips! It rained on the first day when we arrived, so we were lucky to have extra time to catch up on sightseeing. 

Where to stay in Edinburgh

Here are some of our favorites in Edinburgh, 

  • 4 star Moxy Edinburgh Fountainbridge: This classy and cool hotel is located just 15 minutes walk away from Edinburgh Castle. Our room was lovely and spacious. We particularly enjoyed hanging out at the lobby area and the rooftop bar in the evening! Click to check availability here
  • The Balmoral Hotel: This super luxury hotel is located right outside Edinburgh railway station. The high-end rooms at the Balmoral Hotel offer unparalleled views of Edinburgh Castle and the Old Town. Click to book a stay here
  • Radisson Blu Hotel (Edinburgh City Center) : Another city center favorite, the Radisson is located along the Royal Mile, and it is a mid-range hotel. Inside you will find spacious rooms with all modern amenities like a spa, swimming pool, fitness center, and an in-house bar on-site. Book a stay here

Explore the Edinburgh Castle 

In one day in Edinburgh , start sightseeing in the Old Town by visiting the impressive Edinburgh Castle. 

Explore its ramparts and take in spectacular views of the city from its battlements. Then, take a tour of the castle and admire its many grand halls and rooms.

St Giles’ Cathedral

Next, make your way to nearby St Giles’ Cathedral where you can admire its stunning stained glass windows and ancient stone carvings before heading to the nearby National Museum of Scotland (5-minute walk).

Explore this fascinating museum which houses a range of artifacts from all over the world.

Walk the Royal Mile

Continue on to the Royal Mile and take a leisurely stroll along this cobbled street lined with shops, cafes, and galleries. 

Stop for lunch at one of the many traditional pubs before heading to nearby Holyrood Palace where you can admire its impressive architecture and gardens.

Stroll the Princess Street Gardens 

Head to Princes Street Gardens and take a stroll around its lush gardens and admire views of the city skyline. Admire the iconic monuments such as Scott’s Monument, and National Scottish Gallery, if you have time. 

Then, visit nearby Calton Hill for some of the best views in Edinburgh (10 minute walk). 

Continue on to the New Town and explore its elegant Georgian streets. Stop for a coffee at one of the many cafes. 

Arthur’s Seat

End your day with a visit to Arthur’s Seat, an extinct volcano located in Holyrood Park. Admire stunning views of the city before heading back down for a well-deserved dinner.

Day 8 – 10 of United Kingdom Itinerary 10 days: Glasgow and Scottish Highlands

Spend your last 3 days exploring the Scottish Highlands and Glasglow. Drive along beautiful glens, lochs, mountains, and villages. 

Day 8 of the United Kingdom Itinerary: Day tour to Loch Ness

Keeping Edinburgh as a base, you can embark on a guided tour of Loch Ness and other stunning sites within the Scottish Highlands. 

Or if you prefer you can also drive there and stay overnight at Fort William. 

Loch Ness is an impressive body of water and is home to a variety of wildlife, including its most famous inhabitant – the elusive monster known as ‘Nessie’.

As you travel from Edinburgh, you will get to enjoy the stunning scenery of Loch Lomond and The Trossachs National Park, meet Hairy the Moo, cruise on Loch Ness, visit Urquhart Castle, and explore charming towns like Inverness.

Hairy the Moo Scotland

When road-tripping, you can stop at Fort William and visit Ben Nevis Distillery. This will allow you to take a glimpse into the traditional whisky-making process. From stills to barrels to bottling, each step of the whisky-making process is showcased when you book a guided tour!

Tip: When you join a day tour, you will stop at Fort William for lunch and then finish in Pitlochry before returning to Edinburgh.

Day 9 of the United Kingdom Itinerary: Glasgow 

You can still keep Edinburgh as a base and visit Glasgow on a day trip. When driving from Fort Williams, it will take about 2 hours and 50 minutes to reach Glasgow. 

Once in the city, enjoy a nice breakfast, and then go sightseeing. Start with the Glasgow Cathedral. 

Glasgow Cathedral

Glasgow Cathedral is a historic landmark and is well known for its stained glass windows and beautiful architecture. 

The exterior of the cathedral features traditional Gothic architecture from pointed arches, ribbed vaulting, and flying buttresses, to two tall spires that make for an amazing photo background. 

Kelvingrove Art Gallery

Next, make time to visit the Kelvingrove Art Gallery and Museum. It is completely free to visit, and the museum is considered to be one of the most visited in Scotland. 

Botanical Gardens

After time at the museum, head to the Glasgow Botanical Gardens and admire the beautiful floral displays including some of Scotland’s most iconic species. 

The complex is also home to an array of wildlife, including birds, squirrels, ducks, and even frogs.

Clydeside Distillery

Before signing off for the day, visit the Clydeside Distillery, and learn about the whisky-making process from start to finish. After the distillery tour, have some dinner and get rest!

Day 10 of the United Kingdom itinerary : Stirling and back to Edinburgh

Take a short drive or train ride from Glasgow to Stirling before heading back to Edinburgh to catch your flight home. 

If you are keeping Edinburgh as a base, the ride from the Scottish capital to Stirling is just over an hour. 

Stirling has a rich history, dating back to the 11th century when King Malcolm III built a castle on this site. So the first item to check out in this historic city is the Stirling Castle.

Stirling Castle

Stirling Castle is the largest and most impressive of Scotland’s Renaissance castles. We recommend spending 1-2 hours here and taking a self-guided tour of the castle complex. 

Afterward, you can stop by the Church of the Holy Rude to see where King James VI was crowned in 1567.

Doune Castle

Next visit the Doune Castle, which was used as Winterfell in Game of Thrones and Monty Python’s Holy Grail. Explore the grounds and admire the 14th-century architecture before heading back into town. 

Baker Street

Spend the remainder of the day, wandering and exploring Stirling’s main street, Baker Street. Buy some souvenirs, and grab a bite to eat and drink before returning to Edinburgh. 

Other attractions Scotland

If you are a Harry Potter fan and wish to add the Hogwarts Express to your UK 10 itinerary, then consider booking this tour: 2-Day Highlands Tour with Hogwarts Express

This tour takes off from Edinburgh, so we recommend setting aside 1 day in Edinburgh, 1 day in Glasgow (or 2 days in Edinburgh), and then adding this 2 day tour .

The 2-day tour from Edinburgh includes the following,

  • Round trip transportation 
  • Bed and breakfast accommodation
  • Highlands at Dunkeld
  • A ride on the famous Jacobite Steam Train
  • Visit Glen Coe
  • Book this tour here

United Kingdom Itinerary 10 to 14 days Map

uk trip itinerary 10 days

UK Itinerary 10 days with Ireland & Northern Ireland 2 weeks

Okay, so in 10 days you can surely cover England, Scotland, and Wales. To explore Northern Ireland such as visiting Belfast, Giant’s Causeway, and other landscapes you will have to fly to Belfast – which extends your trip by a few more days. 

If you wish to modify the 10 day trip above, you can surely skip the Cotswolds (gain 2 days), and cut short your trip in Scotland by a day or two (gain 2 days), and then add that to explore Northern Ireland. 

With 2 weeks you can use the extra 4 days in Ireland , and here is how you can maximise the trip, 

Day 11 of the 2 weeks in United Kingdom and Ireland:

Fly to Dublin from Edinburgh. This is what we did and we entered the Schengen zone in Ireland and crossed the land border to Belfast. 

You can find RyanAir flights from Edinburgh to Dublin or Belfast. 

On day one in Dublin, spend time exploring the city’s highlights from the Dublin Castle, Temple Bar district, Guinness Storehouse, and a museum visit. 

Stay in Dublin for 2 nights . 

Where to stay in Dublin? We recommend staying at the Hendrick Smithfield , the best property for not breaking the bank while having every luxury you need. 

They got a lovely bar and lobby, and the suites are comfy for a short trip. Check out availability here

Day 12 of the 2 weeks in United Kingdom and Ireland:

Enjoy the wonderful landscapes of the Cliffs of Moher and Galway. You can drive there yourself or book a day tour such as this one that includes Burren, and the monastic ruins of Kilmacduagh. 

Day 13 of the 2 weeks in United Kingdom and Ireland:

This is the day you will arrive in Belfast. It will take less than a 2-hour drive or a 2.50-hour train ride to get there from Dublin. 

In one day in Belfast , visit Saint George’s Market, and Belfast City Hall and set aside time to go on a Black Taxi City Tour, where you will learn about Belfast’s troubled past. 

The tour lasts 4 hours, and it also includes mural stops. Our guide shared so many stories of the troubles, political turmoil, and the events leading up to Bloody Sunday, and its aftermath. 

If you are not interested in this tour, then visit the Titanic Quarter . But ensure you have your tickets booked in advance to avoid disappointment. 

Stay in Belfast for the night.

Where to stay in Belfast? We recommend an overnight stay in Belfast for days 3-4. The Clayton Hotel is a great place to call home for 1-2 days. 

It is located within walking distance of the Titanic Quarter and other sightseeing spots. 

Day 14 of the 2 weeks in United Kingdom and Ireland:

End your itinerary with a visit to Northern Ireland’s only UNESCO World Heritage site – the Giant’s Causeway, and then explore the Dark Hedges, and walk over the Atlantic Ocean at the Carrick-a-Rede Rope Bridge. 

You can drive there yourself or choose this Northern Coast day tour from Belfast that covers all of the places including the ruins of Dunluce Castle whilst enjoying a scenic drive along the Antrim Coast Road. Check it out here

UK Travel Tips and Travel Advice | United Kingdom Itinerary 10 days

When planning to visit the United Kingdom, it is important to pay attention to some important factors such as visa requirements, main attractions & sightseeing spots, and budget.

Firstly, make sure that you check if you need a visa before traveling . Citizens of the United States and Canada do not need a visa to enter the UK and stay there for up to 6 months. 

But depending on your nationality, you may need a special visa for entering the UK. This is not the Schengen Visa, instead, it is a UK tourist visa which one has to apply for prior to flying there.

Once you’ve sorted out the visa, it is time to decide where you want to travel in the UK. London is a great place for tourists and has a wealth of attractions such as Big Ben, Buckingham Palace, and the Tower of London.

There are also plenty of other cities worth visiting such as Edinburgh, Glasgow, Cardiff, and Manchester.

Our 10-day to 14 day UK itinerary is a great place to start your trip planning. If you are adding Dublin or Ireland to the mix , keep in mind that the latter is a European Union and Schengen member state – visa requirements and currency changes when you enter the Republic. 

If you’re visiting the UK on a budget then there are plenty of ways to save money. 

  • There are lots of free museums and parks and gardens dotted across England and the UK
  • Book your accommodation ahead of time to save money, and avoid disappointment
  • Off-season travel is also a good idea for a trip 
  • Eating out can be expensive in the UK so try to find local supermarkets where you can shop for groceries and prepare meals in your accommodations

Ensure you purchase travel insurance before traveling to the UK. This will cover you in case of any unexpected medical bills or cancellations and will help to put your mind at ease.

Get a free quote for Safety Wing Travel Insurance

More UK Travel Tips

When it comes to sightseeing in England, there are plenty of interesting places to visit. Some popular spots include Stonehenge, The Lake District, and The Cotswolds.  Here is a 7 Days in England itinerary Day 1 in London: Exploring the best of London – Buckingham Palace, Hyde Park, Westminster Abbey, afternoon tea cruise Day 2 in London: Natural History Museum, and other museums of choice, Tower of London, Borough Market, Kew Gardens Day 3 in Stonehenge and Windsor: Day trip to the UNESCO World Heritage Site of Stonehenge, and later to Windsor Castle Day 4 in Bath: Roman Baths, Bath Cathedral, Jane Austen centre, sightseeing cruise Day 5 in York:   See the York Minster, National Railway Museum, York City Walls, Cold War Museum  Day 6 in the Cotswolds : 3 to 4 Cotswold Villages – Castle Combe, Burford, Bourton on the Water, Chipping Campden Day 7 in the Peak District

We found trains and buses/coaches to be great for transportation in England. Coaches take time, but they are safe, comfortable, and perfect when traveling with a lot of luggage.  The British train network is well-established and very efficient. They are fast, and easy to navigate once you have a good hang of things. Trains connect you from English cities and towns to Scotland and Wales. 

Based on data from flight comparison sites, the end of December and January are the best months to book a flight to London. Summer months are expensive, and tickets are usually pricier.  We were able to score round-trip flights from Toronto to London Gatwick for $500 CAD in January and the prices stayed that way for most of February for late spring, fall, and November trips. 

The best time to visit the UK is between May and June, September, and October and December. You can take advantage of the warmer mid-year weather to enjoy some of the UK’s most popular events or get in the holiday spirit with a winter break.

Some of the best months to visit England are from May to June, and September and October. During this time, the weather is pleasant with less rain (and also fewer crowds).  The warm summer months July and August are actually one of the wettest, so keep that in mind when packing for your trip to England.

How many days are enough to visit UK?

10 days are great to explore some of the iconic destinations in the United Kingdom. You can visit 2-3 cities, spending 2 days each, and then spend some time in the countryside or nature parks. 

For those who want a comprehensive experience, two weeks is usually enough time to cover most of the country. This way you can also cover Northern Ireland’s natural and cultural attractions. 

Shorter trips of a few days can still be enjoyable if planned carefully. If you only have one week in England then we recommend focusing on London, and nearby areas and squeezing in Cardiff and Snowdonia National Park in Wales.  

Like this post? Read more of our 10 days in Europe trip itineraries

Pin: United Kingdom Itinerary 10 days to 2 weeks

UK 10 day itinerary pin

Mayuri is the founder & editor of ToSomePlaceNew. An Indian-Canadian globetrotter, she has traveled to over 100 cities and 40+ countries.

She has lived in Portugal, Canada and India.

Mayuri has a graduate degree in History and is an MBA. She loves traveling the world particularly Europe, capturing historical nuances, and discussing that over a cup of coffee with her husband, Salil. 

Similar Posts

The Ultimate 2 days in Barcelona Itinerary

The Ultimate 2 days in Barcelona Itinerary

We landed in Barcelona with a bag full of explorer stories – of Christopher Columbus and his sea voyages. Barcelona today is full of artsy landmarks, and it is a football and food heaven. This 2 days in Barcelona itinerary is perfect for a city break, a quick weekend getaway, a stop-over, or an add-on…

One Day in Belfast Itinerary: See Belfast in a day

One Day in Belfast Itinerary: See Belfast in a day

Planning a trip to the birthplace of the Titanic? Here is the perfect one day in Belfast itinerary that checks off the important landmarks, and sites. Even if you have just a day in Belfast, be assured it will be a wonderful experience that will leave you wanting to come back again. That said, in…

One day in Zagreb Itinerary: What to do in Zagreb in one day

One day in Zagreb Itinerary: What to do in Zagreb in one day

Wondering what to do in Zagreb in a day? We got you covered. In this one day in Zagreb itinerary and guide, we will showcase the best spots and landmarks to easily explore and make the most of your time in the stunning capital city of Croatia. Zagreb brought back memories of Central/Eastern European cities….

The Perfect 4 Days in Budapest Itinerary (+ Map)

The Perfect 4 Days in Budapest Itinerary (+ Map)

Beloved by locals and tourists alike, Budapest stands out from other European destinations with its natural setting and an unmatched combination of history, culture, and fine cuisine besides holding a massive reserve of spring water which has made the city the spa capital of the world. In this post, we are sharing the ultimate 4…

The Best 5 days in Munich Itinerary

The Best 5 days in Munich Itinerary

Munich, the Bavarian capital of Germany was our first European destination. It is not only the capital of Bavaria, but also one of the most populous and prosperous cities in Germany. Munich blends in the perfect mix of a modern city and a historical center. The Old town of Munich was the cradle of counter-reformation…

Perfect 3 days in Florence itinerary to see it all

Perfect 3 days in Florence itinerary to see it all

Are you planning a trip to Italy? Florence is the perfect place to visit if you want to see some of the most beautiful works of art in history. The city itself is full of culture and charm, and it’s one of those places that everyone should experience at least once in their lifetime. Read…

Oh, my gosh! I read every word of your itinerary! You did such a great job and supplied a lot of information. I am planning a trip there in September next year as a birthday gift for myself. My husband won’t travel out of the country! I’ve already been to Ireland but might consider returning to Northern Ireland since it rained the entire time I was there! By the way, your photos are beautiful! Thank you so much for sharing! I’m planning to see if I can get a few friends to go but the cost of the trip might be a deterrent since we are all retired now. If I can’t get them to go, I think I’ll do it alone. I went to Italy alone–backpacked at age 68! Thank you again for all the information! I am going to read it again and take notes!

Thank you Sandra! I am so glad you found the post helpful!

You are an inspiration <3 happy travels!

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

Lost In Landmarks

10 days in London and Scotland: a full itinerary

Can you think of a better contrast than the bright lights of London’s city centre and the remote countryside of Scotland? It’s amazing to think that these two different landscapes exist and can be so easily combined.

I’ve explored London and Scotland countless times over the past 20+ years and have used my experience with timings, what to do and transport options to come up with an exciting itinerary for 10 days in London and Scotland.

This article probably contains affiliate links. This means that if you buy or book after clicking, I may get a commission at no extra cost to you. Thanks!

This travel plan will allow time to get to know London and see the sights before whisking you off to the Highlands of Scotland and you’ll also be able to add in the Isle of Skye and Edinburgh too! All in 10 days. Read on for this UK itinerary including London and Scotland and get the low down of what you can do!

A note from the writer: Hey! I’m Kirsty and I’m a UK travel expert – while I grew up in Scotland, as an adult I now return to visit almost every year – there’s so much to see! Shout (or comment below) if you have any questions about your next trip and I’ll get back to you ASAP.

Useful links for your London and Scotland trip:

  • Park Plaza Westminster – hotel in London with Big Ben or London Eye views
  • Apex Grassmarket – Edinburgh hotel with castle views
  • Discover Cars – compare car hire companies for renting a car in the UK
  • Sleeper train – a good option to get to Scotland from London

Table of Contents

St Pauls cathedral in London and Holyrood Palace in Edinburgh

Overview of the 10 day London and Scotland itinerary

Here’s a quick overview of how the itinerary is laid out. Each day is broken down below with ideas on how you can spend your time and where you might like to book for your overnight stay.

Is 10 days enough to explore London and Scotland?

While it’s always nice to have more time than we ever allocate ourselves it’s absolutely enough to visit London and Scotland in 10 days.

You won’t see everything but if you’re clever with timings and how you get from each location (taking overnight trains for example) it’s a good introduction to London and Scotland!

Is it better to hire a car for this London and Scotland itinerary?

You’ll not need a car when in London or while exploring Edinburgh and if you did have one it could prove to be a bit of a hindrance.

I’m assuming use of a car when in the Highlands area. You’ll need 4 days car hire . It’s possible to do this trip with public transport but it’s trickier. A better option for those without a car is to use tours to explore the highlands and I have linked to some good ones.

Another idea is returning the rental car to Edinburgh which will allow for some exploring and enjoyment of the Highlands on the way south. You should check whether there are any restrictions on returning to a different place.

Having your own car allows you much more free time to explore some quieter spots that are away from the bus routes, be able to explore more around Loch Ness to your own timetable and have way more time to explore Skye.

Meal on train to Scotland from London

How do I get between London and Scotland

The two main options I advocate in this itinerary are flight and train.

The itinerary advises to use the overnight Caledonian Sleeper train between London and Scotland because that then saves you having to book a hotel for that night, saving time for exploring. It’s also a really nice, romantic train ride if you’re looking for that!

It’s possible to use day trains though or also take flights. You might like my ‘ how to get to Scotland from London guide ‘ which can help a bit more with the options.

How rushed is this itinerary?

While it would be lovely to linger in Skye and explore much more of the Highlands with just 10 days in London and Scotland you need to make a choice as to what you want to do.

Many people want to tick off some classic Scotland landmarks from their bucket list and Skye is certainly one of them, Loch Ness another which is why they are included.

If you’re using public transport and don’t have your own car then you might feel that this is a lot to include. One way to mitigate this is to use organised tours where you fit a lot in one day but you don’t need to figure it out yourself.

There are many day trips to Skye you could try and plenty of Loch Ness trips as well. Some even cover them both in the same day. You could then use some of the spare time afterwards to explore locally, try local restaurants and generally chill a bit more!

The London and Edinburgh portions can be a rushed or chill as you like. It’s up to you what you include in each bit!

Does this include England?

This 10 day itinerary is for solely London and Scotland and doesn’t include any other towns, cities or sights in England outside of London city.

You might like to add other days on, perhaps to visit Stonehenge or other England attractions.

Notes about your days in London:

London can be as busy, cheap, expensive or chilled as you want it to be. I’m adding in ideas of things you can do, see and explore in certain areas but it’s up to you how much you try and include. Not everyone likes to do the tourist hot spots but similarly not everyone wants to miss them, especially if this is their first time in the country.

Ideas to see more and save money:

  • Hop on Hop off bus tours are good if you want to see a lot and save your legs!
  • The London Pass can also save some money if you want to see a lot of sights.

Evening options:

Theatre lovers will be spoilt for choice and it’s a good thing to do on an evening in London when it gets dark! Check out some tickets here .

Day 0 – Arrive in London

Destination – London

Day 0 is our day to arrive in London. This means that we get 3 full days in the capital city to explore and see some famous landmarks . If you’re arriving early on day 1 this can also work but be kind to yourself with possibilities of jet lag!

Accommodation Option for London:

London has a wealth of places to stay. For this itinerary I suggest sticking close to the center of the city so you don’t have too much travel to do. You’ll need to book either 2 or 3 nights depending on when you’re arriving.

Hotel ideas to get your started –

  • Park Plaza Westminster Bridge (amazing hotel with Big Ben views)
  • St James’s Court (mid range)
  • The May Fair (top end)

London Eye in winter on a grey and cloudy day

Day 1 – Central London

Our first full day in London sees us wander around some of Central London and tick off some of the most popular landmarks in the city.

I recommend sticking around the Westminster and South Bank area. It’s all walking distance (take plenty of rests though!) and there’s plenty to do depending on what you like.

Here are some ideas:

  • See Big Ben and The Houses of Parliament
  • Explore Westminster Abbey
  • See 10 Downing Street
  • Explore London’s WW2 history and visit Churchill’s War Rooms
  • Go on the London Eye
  • Shakespeare’s Globe
  • Cross the Millennium Bridge
  • See St Paul’s Cathedral
  • Take a Thames River Cruise

Accommodation option for day 1:

Museums in Greenwich London

Day 2 – Greenwich

We’re going to head out of central London today to one of the suburbs and one of my absolute favorites too. Greenwich is known the world over for its role in timekeeping (Greenwich mean time – GMT) and has a huge naval history as well.

It’s a welcome change from the busy center of the city, although can still be fairly busy itself!

Ideas of things to do in Greenwich :

  • Take a picnic to the park
  • See the Royal Observatory
  • Spend time in the National Maritime Museum (free)
  • Take a look at the Cutty Sark
  • Old Royal Naval College
  • See the Queen’s House
  • Walk round Greenwich Market and get some great street food
  • Climb the O2

Getting to and from Greenwich:

While not in central London it’s easy to get to Greenwich and you have two main options:

Take the DLR – this is the Docklands Light Railway and is like an overground train. Take a tube to Tower Hill and it’s a short walk to the DLR stop Tower Gateway. The DLR will take you through Canary Wharf, London’s financial district and one of the few places with skyscrapers.

Take a boat – some of the Thames River Boats go to Greenwich as well and it can give you a unique perspective of the city!

Accommodation option for day 2:

kensington palace

Day 3 – Royal London

Our 3rd day in London will explore some of the Royal sites around. As you’re leaving your hotel today you might want to check if they will hold your luggage while you spend the day in the city.

Many will know all about Buckingham Palace of course but there’s actually quite a lot to explore if Royal history is your thing.

These sights are spread out a bit more so you might want to pick and choose what to visit. Perhaps start the day around Buckingham Palace and pick another one or two to add in afterwards. Alternatively if you’re flying or taking a day train to Scotland you’ll want to start early and just have a few planned.

Also, you don’t need to go inside all of these sites to have fun – lots are just as enjoyable from outdoors, especially if the weather is on your side! If you’re on a budget that might be a relief!

Ideas for Royal London:

  • See Buckingham Palace and get a tour
  • Watch the Changing of the Guard
  • See the Royal Mews
  • Learn more in the Guards Museum
  • Enjoy Kensington Palace and gardens – perhaps even have high tea !
  • Get a tour of the Royal Albert Hall
  • Hear stories of the past and see the Crown Jewels at The Tower of London

Accommodation options for day 3:

Overnight Sleeper train to Inverness .

The train goes from Euston at around 9.15pm and gets you into Inverness (and a whole new world) at 8.42 the next morning.

Alternative: a late flight from London to Inverness is also an option giving you a comfy bed in the Scottish Highlands (see next night for hotel recommendations). Check Skyscanner for flight options.

River Ness and Inverness skyline

Day 4 – Inverness

You’ll arrive in the Highlands at around 8.45 in the morning and you might have spent an hour or so enjoying the scenery before arriving (unless you’re travelling in winter when it was likely fairly dark!).

Find your hotel and drop your luggage off and then head into the city to enjoy a late, Scottish breakfast. Maybe it will even include haggis! Certainly some black pudding will be on the menu.

Inverness is a small city and after a busy time in London you’ll probably appreciate wandering around a compact place and having time to savor it.

If you are renting a car in Inverness , then after you’ve picked up your rental car then you might also want to include some different activities just outside of Inverness – depends on how energetic you’re feeling!

Ideas for Inverness:

  • Do the river walk
  • Explore Inverness Castle
  • Lose yourself in Leakey’s Bookshop
  • Inverness Museum and Gallery
  • Go on a boat trip
  • See where the Battle of Culloden happened
  • Explore Clava Cairns , an ancient stone circle
  • See some dolphins at Chanonry Point (car needed)
  • Go to a whisky distillery

Again the Hop On Hop Off bus might be of interest to some.

Accommodation options for day 4:

Hotel recommendations –

  • Black Isle Hostel (budget)
  • The Waverley Guest House (mid range)
  • Glen Mhor Hotel (top end)

view over loch ness

Day 5 – Loch Ness

We’re still based in Inverness today, so no need to check out of the hote. An excellent day trip Loch Ness is easy to get to whether you have your own car, take public transport or choose an organised tour.

For those wishing to use a tour to see Loch Ness this one comes highly recommended.

There’s also a lot to do at Loch Ness so you can spend a good amount of time here today. I recommend getting yourself on a walking trail somewhere around and just enjoying Scotland’s nature. Some give great views of the loch too!

Ideas when visiting Loch Ness:

  • Take a boat trip
  • Explore the local villages
  • Take a walk on one of many trails around
  • Look out for Nessie
  • Check out some local museum/attractions

Accommodation options for day 5

As for day 4

bridge and hills on Isle of Skye

Day 6 – The Isle of Skye

We’re heading out from Inverness nice and early today to get to the Isle of Skye . It’s the only Scottish island that you can get to via a bridge so you won’t need to have to get a ferry! Great for those who don’t enjoy that.

By car it takes around 3 hours to Portree, the main town on the island and where many hotels are. If you leave Inverness by 9am at the latest you should be there for lunch time leaving the afternoon and early evening to explore.

If you don’t have a car then you can get a bus from Inverness to Portree – it takes around 4 hours. Alternatively you could do one of many day tours to Skye from Inverness where someone else drives, you see LOTS of sights and return to Inverness the same day.

Skye attractions to explore on day 6 (and 7)

  • The Quiraing
  • The Fairy Pools
  • Talisker Distillery
  • Neist Point and Lighthouse

Accommodation options for day 6

  • Portree Independent Hostel (budget)
  • The Royal Hotel (mid range)

Eilean Donan castle in the Scottish Highlands

Day 7 – Isle of Skye

We’re doing the return journey to Inverness today so you’ll want to factor in a 3 hour drive back or a bus journey (check last times to get back!)

If there’s anything left on your list to explore you might want to add that in today before you leave. There’s no huge rush though so take your time and see what Skye has to offer.

On your way back I recommend stopping off at Eilean Donan, one of Scotland’s most beautiful castles and one you’ll likely recognise from many images. Or perhaps from the Highlander film!

Our evening is spent in Inverness again – arrange a drop off for your car hire tonight if you have used one as we’ll be taking the train early the next day.

Accommodation options for day 7

edinburgh landmarks dean village

Day 8 – Edinburgh

We’re travelling to Edinburgh today from Inverness and I recommend taking the train just because it’s so enjoyable and you get to see the wonderful Scottish scenery going by.

The train takes around 4 hours and there are a few options. I recommend the 8.42am train which will get you into Waverley Station at 12.49pm. Perfect timing for lunch and to check in to your hotel.

Alternative option – you could fly or you could drive to Edinburgh. Driving is just over 3 hours and means you could stop off along the way to explore some more sights.

For your afternoon in Edinburgh I recommend exploring the New Town which has a lot to offer, plenty of shops (especially compared to how many are in the Highlands!) and amazing architecture. The Princes Street Gardens are a joy when it’s a dry day and there are also a few museums here as well including The Scottish National Gallery.

For something a little different head to Dean Village (which is still in Edinburgh city despite the name). If you’ve seen any instagram videos of Edinburgh you’ll recognise it – its popularity has recently exploded!

Ideas for Edinburgh’s New Town:

  • Princes Street – shops!
  • Calton Hill
  • Dean Village
  • Scottish National Gallery
  • The Royal Scottish Academy
  • Whisky tasting at Johnnie Walker Princes Street
  • Princes Street Gardens
  • Royal Botanic Gardens

Accommodation options for day 8

  • Cityroomz Edinburgh (budget)
  • Apex Grassmarket (mid range) (my absolute favorite hotel for castle views in Edinburgh – get a room with a castle view!)
  • The Balmoral (top end)

Scotch whisky experience on Royal Mile

Day 9 – Edinburgh

Our only full day in the city and I recommend using it to explore the Old Town. For many this is the Edinburgh they came to see and it includes the castle, old buildings, street performers and much more!

I suggest that if you want to include actually visiting inside Edinburgh that you do it first thing. It’s the most popular attraction in Edinburgh and it can get incredibly busy.

If you have any left over Scottish currency it’s a good idea to get it spent today – it’s not always accepted in England (just the banknotes – not the coins)and can be hard to change when you get home.

Here are some ideas for what to do in the Old Town of Edinburgh:

  • Edinburgh Castle
  • Enjoy street performers down the Royal Mile
  • Camera Obscura
  • Whisky Tasting Experience
  • Visit Greyfriars Churchyard (Harry Potter inspiration and home of Greyfriars Bobby)
  • National Museum of Scotland
  • Palace of Holyroodhouse
  • Real Mary Kings Close or do a walking tour of old streets

Accommodation options for day 9

As for day 8

If you need to be back in London early on day 10 for onward travel it may be worth getting the sleeper train overnight from Edinburgh .

Day 10 – Back to London

Today is the last day of the trip and I’m assuming that most people will be heading back to the big city of London for any flights home. Of course if that’s not for you then you can enjoy Edinburgh a little more!

If you have time you could definitely explore some of Edinburgh’s sights that are close to the train station or your hotel this morning (you might need to consider luggage storage though).

Trains from Edinburgh to London take around 4.5 hours and are a good way to get yourself back into the city centre. Trains run all day and so you have a number of options to choose depending on when you need to be back for. I always use Trainline to check times and to book – it’s an easy website to use.

If you’re flying home today you might want to consider the time it will then take for you to get to the airport for check in. Leave yourself plenty of time in case of train delays too.

Alternative – it might be worth thinking about a flight from Edinburgh to London especially if it might get you into the same airport that you’re then flying on from. Many hours can be lost getting to airports around London!

Another alternative could be the overnight sleeper train which will allow another day in Edinburgh and arriving in London early the next day ready for any onward travel. If your day 10 includes an early flight onwards perhaps make the sleeper train your Day 9 accommodation.

🇬🇧 Great Britain Travel FAQ 🇬🇧

Do I need insurance for traveling to Britain?

YES! I always recommend people take travel insurance when exploring the world!

Check Travel Insurance Master for quote comparisons from different providers.

Do I need a car for visiting Britain?

YES – If you’re wanting to explore the whole of Great Britain, or at least some of its wonderful countryside then a car is worthwhile. It will get you around all on your own timetable

I recommend DiscoverCars to compare car rental prices in Britain

How to book accommodation in Britain?

For hotels I recommend Booking.com

For apartments and cottages check out VRBO

Will my phone work in Britain?

Perhaps – it depends if you have roaming enabled and beware this can be an expensive way to use your phone.

If you need a SIM for use in the UK I recommend GiffGaff which you can get and set up before traveling.

What’s the best guidebook for Britain?

I really like the Lonely Planet Guidebooks

Where to get flights for Britain

Skyscanner is my first port of call for finding cheap flights to the UK.

Do I need a visa for the UK?

Many countries don’t need a visa for visiting the United Kingdom as tourists (USA, Canada, Aus, NZ and Europe) – it’s always best to check first though .

Pin for later!

10 day London scotland itinerary pin

Kirsty Bartholomew

4 thoughts on “10 days in London and Scotland: a full itinerary”

What if we have 15 days in Great Britain?

Either slow down and enjoy more of Scotland or you could add in some of England’s sights – maybe a trip to Windsor, Stonehenge or Bath? Depends what you want to see really and how full on a pace you want.

Thanks. I would like to see another day of English Countryside.

There’s loads to see – I’d probably do some day trips from London and explore that way 🙂

Leave a comment Cancel reply

Finding the Universe

Travel tales, photography and a dash of humor

Bamburgh252520Castle252520dream252520smoothed_by_25255B825255D

A One Week UK Itinerary

Last updated: April 19, 2024 . Written by Laurence Norah - 69 Comments

Following on from my two week UK itinerary  post, I wanted to put together a slightly shorter itinerary for those of you with less time, but who still wanted to explore more of the UK than the capital city. And so, I present, our suggested itinerary for one week in the UK.

One Week Uk Itinerary Road Trip Suggestion

The idea of this 1 week UK itinerary is to take in some of the essential highlights of the UK, but also throw in a few curveballs – spectacular places that you would find hard to visit without your own wheels.

If this is your first time driving in the UK, I can also recommend checking out our guide to driving in the UK for tips.

Without further ado, here’s my guide for an awesome:

One Week UK Road Trip Itinerary

We’re going to kick off this itinerary in the UK’s capital, on the assumption that this is where you’re going to fly to when you arrive. There are flights from all over the world to London’s airports, so the chances are pretty high that this is where you’re going to be arriving.

Note that as with any itinerary, this one should be adjusted to your travel style. The itinerary as laid out is very busy, and has you moving quite quickly so as to take in the highlights. So feel free to adjust it to your specific preferences. It could easily be adjusted to accommodate a longer trip for example.

  • Days 1 & 2: London

In general, having a hire car in London is A Bad Idea. What with the congestion charge, antiquated road system, and the fact that the traffic moves slower now on average than it did when horses and carts plied the roads – well, you get the idea.

This isn’t to suggest writing it off though. You have two options – pick up a hire car after your time in London, or stay a little outside the centre in a hotel with parking near a public transport hub. Now, on to London itself.

Tower bridge and river Thames london uk

For your first day of exploration in London, I’d suggest spending your day seeing the essential London sights . London is an eminently walkable city, and you’ll be able to take in the majority of the key highlights, from the Houses of Parliament and Buckingham Palace through to Tower Bridge and the Tower of London .

Then, on your second day, you can either continue to explore London, or you might consider heading out to some of the attractions outside of London.

Popular locations outside the city centre include Windsor Castle , or Hampton Court Palace – both eminently explorable, and easy to reach with a car or by public transport from the city centre.

If you want to save money on the above attractions, and will be visiting a few, then you should definitely consider investing in a London Pass . Available in 1, 3 and 6 day versions, the savings can really be quite impressive if you plan on visiting a few locations. You can read a full break down on if the London Pass is worth buying here , and buy one yourself here .

Finally, London has no shortage of accommodation options, something to suit pretty much every budget. Check out the options for London at booking.com , and here for Plum Guide if you’re looking for an apartment. We also have a guide to where to stay in London .

  • Day 3: Stonehenge, Bath and the Cotswolds

From London, I’m going to suggest you head west, and take in one of Britain’s most recognisable old monuments – the incredible Stonehenge . Visiting Stonehenge is a popular day trip from London, and I have a guide to visiting Stonehenge from London here .

Every year new evidence comes to light as to how these got here, and you can’t fail to be impressed at their massiveness, as well as their seeming impervious nature. Since the motorway was shifted a few years ago, and the fence around the stones moved, this has become a far more pleasant attraction to visit.

Stonehenge sunny moments UK

From Stonehenge, head along to the old town of Bath. A favourite of the Romans, this place has, as you would imagine, some baths to explore, where you can see how the Romans kept themselves clean, plus try some of the waters yourself.

It’s also worth taking the time to check out the Georgian architecture, including the Royal Crescent and the Circus.

You can either overnight in Bath, which might be preferable to driving any more today, or you can head into the Cotswolds. If you do the latter, find yourself a cosy little B&B in the countryside – somewhere you’d likely struggle to get to with public transport – and really take advantage of having your own wheels!

Bath Abbey

  • Days 4 & 5: Warwickshire, The Peak District & Yorkshire

After a pleasant overnight in Bath or the Cotswolds, it’s time to turn North, and head up towards Yorkshire. This will be a bit of a drive, but there are some highlights on the way that I’d recommend stopping at to break up the journey.

First, I’d suggest stopping off at Baddesley Clinton , a moated manor house just outside of Warwick. This is a spectacular property, over 500 years old, which will give you an insight as to how the British aristocracy lived in the middle ages.

Highlights include the glorious moat that surrounds the building, and the priest-holes in the house itself, where the Catholic priests of the time would hide from persecution and execution.

 Baddesley Clinton House Warwickshire UK

If you’d prefer to explore an interesting town, then I can recommend dropping in to Warwick. There’s enough to do here to fill a day (especially if you decide to visit the Castle!), but I’d suggest at least visiting the Lord Leycester Hospital, and St. Mary’s Church .

The former isn’t, and has never been, a hospital, instead, for over 400 years it has housed military veterans of Britain’s various wars. It’s a fascinating cluster of houses, dating from the 14th century, and is basically everything you could hope for in a medieval construction.

 Lord Leycester Hospital Warwick UK

St Mary’s Church is one of the largest churches (I thought it was a cathedral when I first spotted it) in the UK, home to a gorgeous medieval chapel, a magnificent view from the top of its tower, and 1000 years of worshipping history.

Medieval chapel st marys church warwick UK

Alternatively, you could also choose to visit Stratford-upon-Avon , the birthplace of Shakespeare.

Once you’re done with the above, it’s time to leave Warwickshire behind, and head on up to the Peak District, where I’m going to suggest you spend the night – there are some really fantastic accommodation options on hand, to suit every budget .

After your night in the Peak District, set aside a morning for visiting Chatsworth House . Often voted the UK’s favourite country house – if you’re going to take in a stately home on a spectacular scale, then this is an excellent choice.

Still home to the Duke and Duchess of Devonshire, the property has 126 rooms, with a number of these open for public viewing. Surrounding the property itself are 105 acres of magnificent garden, constructed across six centuries, and reflecting changing times and fashions. You’ll easily be able to lose a morning at Chatsworth!

From Chatsworth, it’s a 2 hour blast up to the next stop on our itinerary – the gorgeous ruined remains of Fountains Abbey , a UNESCO World Heritage Site set in Studley Royal Park.

1120203-01

As well as the well preserved ruins of the giant 12th century Cistercian monastery, you’ll also find the rather impressive 18th century water garden, generally recognised as the most important in the UK.

If you can,  I’d suggest exploring right through until the sun sets, which should afford you some wonderful photography opportunities. There’s lots of ground to cover, and if you find yourself tiring, there’s an excellent tea room.

When you’re done, find yourself somewhere to stay in the nearby area .

  • Day 6: Northumberland

You’ll be starting your sixth day of exploration bright and early in Yorkshire, and continuing northwards, this time to the country of Northumberland, home to the city of Newcastle, the island spanning Hadrian’s Wall, and some of England’s finest medieval castles.

Bamburgh Castle Northumberland

It’s the latter that I’m going to suggest you focus on in Northumberland. You’re unlikely to be able to do all of the following in the time available, but I’d definitely suggest that you visit at least two of the following four sights when in Northumberland, starting with:

Alnwick Castle . Home to the Duke of Northumberland, and dating from 1036, this is the sort of castle that you probably think of when you think of medieval fortress castles.

It’s also the sort of castle you might think of if you’re a Harry Potter fan, as a number of the scenes from the earlier Harry Potter movies , including the Quidditch training scenes, were filmed here. If you’re more of a Downton Abbey fan, well, the last two Christmas specials of the show were filmed here.

It would be easy to spend a day here, particularly as the gardens are also very picturesque, so you’re welcome to do just that. But, if you’re keen to see some more of England’s incredible castles, head along to:

Bamburgh Castle . I absolutely love the coastal location of Bamburgh Castle, which is just perfect for photography, atop a rocky outcrop by a golden sand beach. The native Britons of the area thought so too – with a fort housing the original Kings of Britain located here. Of course, that all came to an end when the Vikings popped over in 993 and presumably burnt the place to the ground.

Bamburgh Castle

The castle that’s on the site today was built by the Normans, in the 11th century, and is another imposing fortress like construction, designed to withstand brutal assault and siege warfare.

Since you’re in the area for Bamburgh, you might also take the time to take a look at either Dunstanburgh castle , a few miles to the south, or Holy Island, a few miles to the north. The former was a 14th century fortification that fell into ruin by the 16th century – the latter is an island, accessible at low tide, and where you’ll find the still inhabited Lindisfarne Castle , which you can also tour.

Lindisfarne Castle Northumberland

If you’re more interested in Roman history than castles,  then I’d suggest you visit Hadrian’s Wall. Built during the time of Emperor Hadrian (122AD if you’re not up to speed on Roman timelines), this wall stretched from one side of England to the other, and marked the northern limit of the Roman empire. The precise reason for building a 73 mile wall is still unclear, I suspect it was largely just because they could.

There are multiple locations where you can visit the wall, with my favourite being Sycamore Gap, near Housesteads Crag, where a lonely tree sits amongst the remains of the highest part of the wall.

From Hadrian’s Wall, head north, to the Scottish capital of Edinburgh, either overnighting in the Scottish Borders, or Edinburgh itself.

  • Day 7: Edinburgh

This trip finishes off in Edinburgh, one of my favourite cities in the UK, and where you’ll have no shortage of things to do . However, since you have a car, I have two suggestions that you might want to add to the list. First – head to the Pentland Hills. A few miles south of the city, these offer excellent walking, sheep spotting opportunities and iron age hill forts.

Pentland sunset resevoir boats

I’d also suggest you make the time to head out to an icon of the Edinburgh surrounds – the Firth of Forth bridges, and in particular, the UNESCO World Heritage Listed Firth of Forth Rail Bridge.

This is a mighty red cantilevered bridge construction spanning the Firth of Forth, opened in 1890, and still operational today. At it’s time of construction it was the longest single cantilever bridge in the world, and despite now being the second longest, is still mighty impressive.

Forth Bridge 1

Finally, of course, I’d recommend spending some time exploring Edinburgh, which has no shortage of attractions, fine dining, shopping and places to stay . Whether you’re into Harry Potter or festivals , you’re bound to find something to do.

Then – turn your car in, and head home – Edinburgh airport is easy to drive to, has all the main car hire operator’s, and you should be able to fly from here to anywhere you like. Whew! I hope you enjoyed that tour!

1 Week UK Itinerary Map

To help you visualise this driving route of the UK, we’ve put together this map of the route. You can also see this on Google Maps here .

1 week UK itinerary road trip map

1 Week UK Itinerary Summary

As mentioned at the start of the post, this itinerary is quite busy. If you have limited vacation time, then you can definitely do a lot in a short time and see the highlights, but be aware you will not be able to explore every location in great depth.

If you prefer to travel more slowly, you’ll definitely want to tweak this itinerary for your own travel style, either by adding more time, or changing the route.

How to Get Around the UK

Well, this one should be pretty obvious! I’m going to suggest a rental car of course. This itinerary is really only do-able if you drive yourself.

We recommend you compare car prices using a service like Discover Cars , which compares prices across a range of providers to help you find the best deal.

Hire car autoeurope Scotland sunset

When To Visit the UK

The UK has what could best be described as “variable” weather. The good news is that you don’t really get extremes of weather. The bad news is that being surrounded by water, it tends to rain a lot, throughout the year.

Obviously, the summer period is likely to be warmer than the winter period, but the climate is generally mild, so whenever you visit, plan for the gamut of weather conditions, from rain to sunshine. Layers are key to your clothing, meaning you can adjust as the weather changes.

20160218113905_IMG_5331-02

My main piece of advice for a trip like this is to avoid popular weekends and school holidays if you can. The UK has a number of public holidays throughout the year, when the roads (and attractions) get very crowded. If you can avoid these times, you’ll have a far more pleasant experience.

Time of year wise, there’s no “bad” time to visit, but I’d advise perhaps May / June might give you the best shot of decent weather, whilst avoiding the summer school holiday period.

Where to Stay in the UK

The UK has loads of accommodation options, from cosy B&B’s through to upscale hotels, as well as all the chains you’d expect.

  • We’ve tried a lot of booking sites, and nearly always find ourselves using Booking.com. They have an extensive selection of properties, many with no-fee cancellation policies, and often run discounts and special offers. Click on each city title to see their listings:  London , the Cotswolds , the Peak District , Yorkshire and Edinburgh ,
  • If you prefer an apartment or more of a hosted stay, then we recommend Plum Guide . We’ve tried all the others, and Plum Guide consistently has the best quality in all the locations we’ve used them in.
  • If you can’t find what you want on Plum Guide, or you want some new options to try out, we have some alternatives we also use. We suggest trying Vrbo to start with. For even more ideas to help you save money and get the best choice, we wrote a whole post on the best alternatives to AirBnB , as well as a guide to our favourite holiday cottage accommodation in the UK , which you should check out!

Between these options, you should find the best prices and places to stay for your trip, as well as a good selection of reviews and feedback to help you make an informed decision.

Pentland sunset fields

What about a Tour of the UK?

We’re often asked if a trip like this can be done as part of a tour instead of driving yourself. The answer is – yes it can, and you have a few options for doing so.

First, you could take a group tour of the UK. This will take you to a wide variety of sights, with someone else handling all the logistics, and letting you just relax and chill out.

We have used and can recommend  Rabbie’s Trail Burners for group tours – they’re a small group tour operator with lots of experience and great guides, and they have a wide range of tours of varying lengths covering many parts of the UK. This 8 day tour they offer for example runs from London to Edinburgh and gives you an idea of what can be done in that time period.

You can also arrange a private tour. This will usually be a more expensive option, but will mean you can put something totally customised together. This is a service offered by a number of companies, we would again recommend Rabbie’s Trail Burners who offer a  customised tour service .

Another option we are happy to recommend is professional driver-guide Robina Brown, who is a blue-badge guide offering tours across the UK. See her website  here .

Further reading for your UK trip

And that sums up our guide to the perfect 1 week UK itinerary. Before you go though, we’ve got lots of resources to help you plan your trip to the UK, from posts we’ve written ourselves to third party content we’re happy to recommend. Here it is:

  • If you want a longer trip, taking in some more highlights of the UK including Wales and Ireland, check out this two week itinerary of the UK that I put together. We also have a detailed Wales road trip itinerary .
  • As this is a self-drive trip, you should definitely check out our guide to driving in the UK for tips.
  • For budget planning, see our guide to how much it costs to travel in the UK
  • If you’d prefer not to drive, we also have an itinerary for 10 days in the UK by public transport .
  • A guide to driving Scotland’s epic North Coast 500 , as well as accommodation options on the North Coast 500
  • A Two Day Edinburgh Itinerary & 21 Highlights in Edinburgh
  • Edinburgh: Getting off the beaten path
  • If you like Royal themed attractions, Jess wrote a full post about the Royal Edinburgh Ticket here , which can help you save money on some of Edinburgh’s top attractions.
  • A guide to 10 of the best Stately Homes in England , to give you some ideas as you plan your itinerary
  • A Two Day London Itinerary
  • A Six Day London Itinerary
  • The Best Photography Locations in London
  • Tips on Buying and Using the London Pass
  • Eight Things to Do in Kensington
  • The Highlights of Oxford
  • Visiting Blenheim Palace and the Cotswolds
  • 20 Things To Do in Dublin
  • A Guide to Touring the Scottish Borders
  • Our guide to things to do in Cambridge
  • If you want a physical (or digital!) book to accompany your travels, then Amazon do a good line in UK Travel Guides , and there is naturally a Lonely Planet and a Rough Guide to the UK available.

The perfect itinerary for a one week self-drive road trip of the UK, featuring ancient monuments, medieval towns, crumbling castles and more! Includes tips on where to stay, when to go and how to get around.

Enjoyed this post? Why not share it!

There are 69 comments on this post

Please scroll to the end to leave a comment

28th January 2023 at 3:25 pm

Hi Lawrence,

I’m doing a 5 day trip on my motorbike from Liverpool to London. I’ve tried to pull together a route but I seemed to have picked the wrong stop points as I don’t know a lot about the areas. I would like history, good views and to stay away from busy cities where I can. Could you recommend a route please?

Thank you! Sasha

Laurence Norah says

29th January 2023 at 9:03 am

So I would probably head east from London towards Stonehenge / Avebury, where you can definitely see some history. Salisbury is also a lovely town to explore. From there, I’d head north up into the Cotswolds, which has a lot of stunning villages and quintessential English countryside. Towns like Circencester, Bibury, Burford, Bourton on the Water etc. There are lots of nice B&B style accommodation options in the area to enjoy. If you are interested in Shakespeare, you can head up to Stratford-Upon-Avon which is also a nice town. After that I’d suggest the Peak District National Park which is also very pretty. Chatsworth House is a lovely stately home but there is good walking and lots of nice villages here as well. From there it’s an easy trip across to Liverpool perhaps via Chester if you have spare time.

I hope this makes sense, let me know if you need any more input!

Safe travels, would love to hear how your trip goes 🙂

2nd December 2022 at 4:36 pm

Hello Laurence, I need help please, so we are following your 7 days road trip to Edinburg. 1 Week UK Itinerary Summary Days 1 & 2: London Day 3: Stonehenge, Bath and the Cotswolds from costwold, is it possible to drive through Yorkshire straight to Manchester Days 4 & 5: Warwickshire, The Peak District & Yorkshire (for this 2 days we want to stay in Manchester) from Manchester train to Edinburgh.. Do we need to rent a car in Edinburgh? Day 6: Edinburg Day 7: Edinburgh

What do you think?

Thank you in advance.

4th December 2022 at 10:39 am

Sure thing. So yes, it is possible to drive from the Cotswolds to Manchester, it’s about a 3 hour drive. However you won’t be driving through Yorkshire, which is to the east and north of Manchester. You would also have passed Warwickshire and the Peak District if you drive up to Manchester as they are both south of Manchester.

For Edinburgh you definitely don’t need a car, the city centre is very easy to get around either on foot on by local bus. The only exception would be if you wanted to visit sights out of town of course.

Have a great trip!

5th December 2022 at 4:20 pm

Thank you for your help! Merry Christmas!🎄

10th November 2022 at 4:48 pm

Hi Laurence and Jessica, The only blog that I can trust. Thank you for this wonderful article. We are travelling to Uk on august , for 7 days before heading to Ireland. I have a question, my husband’s dad was born in manchester and grandmother born in Bath. so we will definitely visit bath and probably stay in costwold for the night (can you recommend a hotel or b and b) in this itinerary can we add manchester before edinburgh?

Thank you for taking time to read. God bless you both!

11th November 2022 at 11:13 am

My pleasure. So yes, you could definitely tweak this itinerary to include Manchester, it would be around days 4 or 5 and you would want to adjust what you see in that area instead. It’s quite a busy itinerary already, so you would definitely want to swap something out.

In terms of a hotel, there are so many great ones to choose from and it would really depend a lot on how far from Bath you wanted to drive. Bath is right at the southern end of the Cotswolds, and you can drive for a couple of hours from there up to Chipping Norton, and all of that drive would be through the Cotswolds. Villages to consider would be Bibury, Bourton on the Water, Lower Slaughter, Stow-on-the-Wold, Broadway and Chipping Campden. I think any of those would be a lovely option.

Have a wonderful time!

11th November 2022 at 4:23 pm

Great Thanks. I appreciate it.

16th August 2019 at 9:08 pm

Thank you for your blog. This is a trip for the future — just took my family to Venice and Paris for 10 nights. Anyway, as a note, I would estimate that your itinerary is too full (both of them). It’s very high paced without real time to stop and smell the roses. But, it’s a very, very solid starting point, well considered, and much better than anything I have. Thanks again!

16th August 2019 at 9:12 pm

Our pleasure 🙂 We absolutely agree that this is a pretty full itinerary, and as you say, most of our itineraries are. The idea is to show what is possible (some people really like to pack it in!), but we highly recommend folks pare them back to what is suitable for them, as everyone has a different travel style. So we hope this works as a good basis for you to work from, and that you have a great trip in the future!

16th August 2019 at 10:43 pm

Awesome photography, too!

17th August 2019 at 9:17 am

Chiang Kok Weng says

15th July 2019 at 12:42 pm

Dear Laurence and Jessica, we are from Singapore. We are a family of 4 adults planning to do a one week tour of UK at the end of the year, just after Christmas and into the New Year. We saw your one week itinerary and it looks quite fun and exciting. We are wondering if this itinerary is doable with self-drive as we are not familiar with the crowd, weather and road condition during this period.

Thanks much!

18th July 2019 at 3:32 am

This should be fine even at Christmas and New Year. Snow is uncommon in the UK – usually it is just wet. Of course, it is possible that there will be snow and ice, but the roads are usually well treated so you should not have any problems. Just drive to the conditions of the road and you should be fine. Have a great trip and let me know if you have any more questions!

13th July 2019 at 7:11 am

Hi, just wanted to say thanks for sharing all this! I know it is a ton of work but your posts are amazing!

13th July 2019 at 4:20 pm

Thanks very much Amber, it’s appreciated 😀

Carole Cavers says

3rd July 2019 at 2:25 am

Dear Laurence and Jessica, My husband and I are from New Zealand and are planning a trip to the UK for the first time. We arrive at Heathrow on the 20 August 11.45am and leave from Heathrow 20 September. We have been looking at lots of options and have decided to rent a car to travel around England, Scotland and Wales. We intend to fly to Ireland and pick up another rental car (if you think that would be wise) to see the sights there. My question is, what would you recommend for an itenarary so we get to see some sights in each country, finishing our trip with 5 days in London for sightseeing. Your recommendations would be much appreciated.

3rd July 2019 at 3:07 pm

So my advice would be to essentially follow my two week UK itinerary ( https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/two-weeks-in-ukmy-perfect-itinerary/ ), but to extend it to a month. I would also recommend flying across the Irish Sea rather than worrying about car rentals and ferries. It wouldn’t be heard to extend the itinerary as you could add in time in Wales, the Highlands, and much more time in Ireland. But it should give you a good basis for a trip that you can work on.

I hope this helps a bit!

5th April 2019 at 3:19 pm

Hi Laurence…so many helpful hints on your site for us ignorant non Brits! I’d love your opinion on our September 4 wk visit from Aust. All accommodation booked – 3 nts Prague, 4 nts Paris, 10nts London, train to Bath, pick up hire car to Mevagissey 3 nts, 3 nts Cotswolds, 1nt York, 1 nt Ft William, 2 nts Plockton, Edinburgh 1 nt via Perth. Leave car.. Then we’d like to train from Edinburgh to Windsor as have 2 nts booked there before flying home – . It seems that we have to change trains at Piccadilly or Kings Cross to get the Windsor line..any suggestions please? ( picturing us 3 over 65 ers in peak hr with luggage climbing stairs at a train station ???? ( pretty stretch Edinburgh to York so not keen on flying ) Locals on other forums are horrified at us doing so much driving in that time but many OP here doing similar so don’t feel so bad! Thanks so much for any thoughts you have on all of this!

5th April 2019 at 4:01 pm

Thanks very much. I’m happy to help out of course. It sounds like you have an amazing trip planned out!

Since everything is booked it sounds like the itinerary is fairly well arranged. My only feedback is that 10 days is quite a long time in London, although there is so much to see that you could easily fill more time than that. Our 6 day London itinerary is probably going to give you the most help in terms of planning. You can see that on our other blog here: https://independenttravelcats.com/london-itinerary-6-days-in-london/

For your first question, you are correct about needing to change trains. The majority of trains from Edinburgh arrive at Kings Cross, wheras trains to Windsor go from Paddington or Vauxhall. In either case, you are going to have to take the underground, and trust me, I know what carting luggage around down there is like!

The good news is that Kings Cross tube station is now fully accessible, which means that there are lifts from the platform to street level. I should warn you in advance though that you do have to take multiple lifts, there is not just one lift. There will be a lift map to help you figure this out. This is because the station was built a good long time ago, before such things as lifts to tube platforms were thought of as being handy, so they’ve had to put lift shafts where they can rather than necessarily where is totally logical.

At the other end, Vauxhall also has full lift access. Paddington has escalator access, so if you prefer a lift, the route from Vauxhall will be easier.

In terms of your itinerary, especially given that you are coming from Australia, I suspect you will not find the driving distances that long! After my year of travelling in Australia, my perspective of what makes for a “long drive” certainly changed a great deal! The longest drive you have is going to be between York and Fort William. That would be nearly a 6 hour drive without stops.

I hope this helps, don’t hesitate to let me know if you have any more questions 🙂

Kathy Jones says

6th April 2019 at 1:51 am

Hi again Laurence……do you think the scenery is worth taking the train (first class maybe) from Edinburgh to London please? ( I’ve read posts that it’s lovely especially Edinburgh to York). Otherwise we’d consider flying using Easyjet. Also we wondered about train London to Truro or Bodmin ( sleeper?) to save a bit of driving! Good idea or not? Getting an idea how hire car versus train cost, for this trip is confusing …prices vary a lot. Thanks heaps.

6th April 2019 at 12:26 pm

The view from Edinburgh to York on the train is really nice, I have done that journey many times, and the Northumberland coastline is just stunning. First class is going to be more comfortable, and if you book well in advance the prices are not that expensive either. Flying is another option, but to be honest, the time saving is a bit of a myth – by the time you’ve got to the airport at one end and from the airport at the other, as well as gone through security etc, it won’t really save you any time. Plus the train doesn’t require you to worry about bag weight and size.

Train prices vary a lot depending on the time of day, day of week and how far in advance you book. Going to Cornwall for example on a Friday afternoon will likely be more expensive as it’s popular time to return from London. Car hire might be cheaper, especially as you can split it between you, whereas you need individual train tickets. Note that cars are usually cheaper to hire from city centre locations rather than airports. The overnight train is a good option, but these are usually not budget options. However you do save a night in a hotel, which is another cost. I would definitely recommend having a car in Cornwall for sight seeing though.

Kathy J says

6th April 2019 at 3:06 pm

Thanks again for your time Laurence. Sensible advice there…!! I spend too much time browsing your website ????

6th April 2019 at 3:11 pm

My pleasure Kathy. Delighted to have been of help 😀

Greg n Ramona Willingham says

6th February 2019 at 1:15 am

Laurence & Jessica, I am so thrilled to have found y’all and your amazing website. My husband and I are from Alabama here in the States and are super excited for our upcoming trip. We are working together to plan an experience of as many sites as are reasonably possible, without stressing ourselves out, and doing a fair job at controlling our modest budget. We feel that experiences shouldn’t cost a fortune and responsible spending is doable without sacrificing quality. I have been doing research for almost 2 months and cannot believe it took that long to find all of this fantastic information! Thank you for sharing your experiences, guides and useful information. My husband and I are planning our 20th anniversary trip to the UK; England/Wales/Scotland & Ireland for November 8-24, 2019. We will fly overnight on the 8th and return the 24th. I have researched public transport (coaches/trains), car hires, & even various flights from one main local to another. We are flying into London at approximately 10am November 9th and planned to nap after settling in and then exploring London. We will be flying out of Dublin the morning of the 24th back to London until our later afternoon flight that same day. We have considered doing a sail-rail pass to Dublin from Scotland or England, even though it’s a bit pricey. Many people have told us that it’s an unforgettable experience. We are strongly leaning towards a car hire for the UK portion and then returning the car for a flight to Dublin from Glasgow or the sail/rail pass over. While in Dublin, we plan on doing day trips from there. We feel having a base is more secure and comfortable than lugging around our packs….lol!!! ???? I have discovered that we can do 5 days of single day trips for about $550/each for those 5 days and have found that the price is relatively inexpensive due to the transport, entrance fees, tour guides, and the few meals included. This should also give us the opportunity to allow another to drive as we relax on the last leg of our trip. Those day trips will allow us to venture to all coasts and Belfast: 1-Aran Islands-2-Cork/Cobh-3-Wicklow/Avora Mill Village…(misspell I’m sure ????)-4-Belfast/Giants Causeway-5-Dublin itself. Respectively, that should place UAB in Dublin the night of the 18th or early the 19th. My husband wants to do the ferry but considering the cost and the time needed I am more inclined to fly over for a small fare and enjoy a day of settling in and exploring a bit for dinner and guiness rofl ????. However, I suggested we maybe do a ferry to Isle of Man. I think he would enjoy that area as an avid rock-climber. We would like to add Bath & Cardiff to our road trip out of London then maybe head to the car museum in the Coswolfs then off to Chester-York-Newcastle-then on into Scotland for Edinburgh-Pitlochry (probably spelt that wrong too ????)-Inverness-Maybe Skye-Definetly Glen Co-Glasgow-Then on to Dublin by ferry or flight; as stated prior. Stonehenge isn’t a top priority for us but we dont mind drive by for a photo or 2, then to Bath and on to Cardiff. Would this be doable with our travel time and driving ourselves or would we better served searching out daytrips or multiday trips from London on to Edinburgh, etc? If this is doable, is our planned route workable or should we modify our planned route? Oh, my husband would also like to visit Greta Green but I’m unsure how to make that happen. Could York to Greta Green before going on to Edinburgh be feasible? Thank you in advance for your time and information. Greg & Ramona ????????????

6th February 2019 at 10:49 am

Hi Greg and Ramona!

Wow, sounds like you’ve done a great job of planning 🙂 I would say that your route is certainly do-able. Personally I’d fly from Glasgow to Dublin as you have mentioned, it will take a bit less time. For your trip, I think driving yourself is going to be your best option as it will give you the flexibility you will need, and you won’t have to keep returning to a base which will cost you time. I think your timetable is busy but certainly achievable, and your route looks sensible to me.

York -> Newcastle -> Gretna Green -> Edinburgh is possible. It’s a bit of a detour but not a major one 🙂

Let me know if I can be of any more help!

7th February 2019 at 5:10 pm

Thank you for the quick reply Laurence. It’s great to hear we are on the right track with our plans and that the flight seems the most reasonable way to get to Dublin without a large amount of time wasted. Thank you again and have a blessed day. ????????????

Patt Snow says

20th December 2018 at 3:08 pm

I loved reading your itineraries! So very helpful! I will be traveling in May, 2 weeks with my hub and granddaughter recent high school graduate, she’s an avid reader, taught herself Welsh, wants to be a librarian. Here’s my conundrum: I rented a condo near Snowdonia NP for one week and cannot cancel without relinquishing my payment. What do you recommend for that week and then if I could extend our trip for an additional 8 days what path would you take? We will rent a car in London on our way of the city…I’m allowing 2 nights in London and then onto Snowdonia! Thank you so much for any input!

20th December 2018 at 3:16 pm

Our pleasure. Snowdonia is a stunning part of the UK, and you won’t regret spending a week there. I spent a long time in this area as my grandparents used to live in the national park, and it is magnificent. There is plentiful hiking as well as lovely coastline, beaches, and cute villages and towns to visit. So don’t worry, you will have a wonderful time. It’s also the part of Wales where Welsh is quite commonly spoken, so your daughter will have ample opportunity to practice.

If you did want to extend, my advice would be to visit some of the towns and cities between London and Snowdonia, so as to have a balanced trip – Snowdonia is more countryside, so you might want to experience a bit of culture. So some ideas might be Oxford, Liverpool, Bristol or Bath, to give you a balanced trip!

I hope this helps – have a wonderful trip!

20th December 2018 at 3:47 pm

Laurence, thank you for your prompt reply. We are definitely looking forward to our time in Snowdonia! I’m just not certain how to incorporate driving time. London to 2 nites Oxford, then onto Wales. Would a day trip from Snowdonia to Cardiff be crazy as far as drive time? Then, I’m thinking ferry to Dublin and driving north, reentering Great Britain in Scotland, visiting Highlands 1 day, driving to Edinburgh for two nights,and back to London for two nights???? Is two nights in Ireland enough time? Of course we want to kiss the Blarney stone! I’m all over the place????!

20th December 2018 at 3:55 pm

No worries 😀 So I think you could do just one night on Oxford and still see plenty. Snowdonia to Cardiff would be a long drive – there are no motorways in Wales, so driving times are significantly increased compared to the rest of the country. So I wouldn’t personally do that trip, but it’s up to you of course.

Otherwise your itinerary looks pretty good. Of course, there’s never enough time and always more to see, and you will be driving a fair bit, but if you are happy with that then go for it!

20th December 2018 at 5:11 pm

Laurence! You are awesome! Thank you so much for your input! I love a good Roadtrip and am so very excited to visit these wonderful places I’ve always read about!! Your site has certainly given me a great guideline…I’m not feeling terribly overwhelmed at this moment!???? I think I can plan this! I thank you so very much and I look forward to reading about more of your travels!!!

20th December 2018 at 5:13 pm

Thanks Patt, that’s brought a big smile to my face! Do let me know if we can help any more. If not, we always love to hear how trips go after the fact 😀

Sylvia says

12th October 2018 at 9:13 am

Hello Laurence & Jessica, I am so glad to chance upon your site, So love your story sharing and the photographs. THANK YOU!

I am Sylvia from Singapore, have spent 2-yr in Newcastle in mid 90’s and have been to various parts of England & Scotland. My last trip was 15 yr ago (didn’t realize it’s been so long)! I am planning a 8.5-days trip in Dec with my family (arriving 3rd, departing night of 11th). My teenage daughter has never been to UK and I’d love to show her it’s really more than London. Anyway, this trip is really for her. 🙂

I’d like to get your advice.. here’s the must have.. London, Stonehenge, Bath, Manchester (to catch a match on 5-Dec), Newcastle. My hubby has very fond memories of Wales and be great if we could include a walk/hike in the region. A trip to York/Edinburgh or Ireland would be bonus but not sure if time permits. Is it better to start from London (3-4 Dec)? Would it be less crowded on Mon/Tue to weekend? Another crazy thought is include a day trip to Paris.

Also, would be great if you can recommend some places for best fish & chips, scones and a good pint of guinness.

Much thanks! Sylvia

13th October 2018 at 11:55 pm

Thanks for your comment, it’s always appreciated! Let me try to help!

Your trip does sound do-able, but it depends on how rushed you wanted to be. We’d suggest at least two days in London, and from London it’s easy enough to do a day trip that includes Stonehenge and Bath. However, as you are doing Manchester on the 5th, you might need to do this after that, as you’ll want to get up to Manchester in time for the match on the 5th. A train to Manchester from London is easy enough, just book in advance for the best tickets. Then you can get a train from Manchester to Newcastle, and then back down to London.

If you wanted to visit Wales, I think the best option would be from Manchester. York could be done on the way from Manchester to Newcastle, either as a day stop or an overnight stop.

Personally, with the time you have I’d probably advise against adding Ireland or France, as it’s just going to involve more travel days and less time sight-seeing. For food and drink, to be honest, most pubs serve decent Guinness these days, just make sure you visit a popular one so that the barrels are regularly cleaned. We usually just check google reviews, and find a pub that does good fish and chips. London will generally be more expensive, other cities less so 🙂

Hope this helps!

14th October 2018 at 2:35 pm

Thank you Laurence! We plan to self-drive (outside of London) for greater flexibility. Will use your links to book car and accommodation. I will share with you how our trip goes. Regardless, I know it will be a blast!

Let me know if I can bring anything for you from Singapore. 🙂

17th October 2018 at 7:36 pm

Hey Sylvia! Thanks so much 😀 We’ve not actually visited Singapore, so we don’t know what we would want, but that’s very kind of you to offer 🙂 Do let us know how your trip goes!

Miyako says

20th September 2018 at 7:40 am

Hello, I would greatly appreciate some advice on our first 9D8N trip (last min) in early Nov to London. We will be flying into Gatwick and leaving from there. There are so many sight-seeings in London, however we are thinking if we could squeeze in a self-drive to see the countryside.

What would the weather be like in November? We are hoping to capture some gorgeous pics at the countryside. If the weather is bad, then perhaps we will just do London and one more city.

We would like to visit the following: Windsor Castle Bath Stonehenge Chelsea Stadium Edinburgh

Westminister Abbey St Paul’s Cathedral Imperial War museum Churchill War rooms Tower Bridge Shard skyscrapper Big Ben British museum London Bridge experience Sky Garden Shakespeare’s Globe Theatre Moulin Rouge London eye London zoo

Is it too ambitious? Could you help us plan a route that is most efficient? We would also like to catch a musical.

Many thanks in advance!

21st September 2018 at 2:19 pm

Your itinerary definitely looks achievable. I would suggest you need around three- four days in London to get all those things done. You would then want a day for Stonehenge and Bath, and half a day for Windsor. These are possible as day trips from London, or you can visit them independently. So with the amount of time you have, i think you should be fine.

My only feedback is around the Moulin Rouge – do you mean the musical? Because the actual Moulin Rouge is in Paris 🙂 For Edinburgh I would recommend at least two days. If you only visit Edinburgh, it will probably be quicker to fly or take the train.

6th September 2018 at 6:32 pm

Hi Laurence,

Cass here from Malaysia 🙂 I’m doing some research to plan for a 5 days (11th -15th Sept) road trip from London to Edinburgh & back to London, and found that your article is really useful for me & the itinerary pretty fits to my itinerary!

Appreciate if you could advice on my 5 days itinerary if I’m driving with my family (6 of us)? Or would you suggest us to go with other transportation? If you recommend driving, where is good to rent a 7 seaters?

I think I would most likely follow 80% of your itinerary here but would be helpful if you could share some advice here as I have some concerns. I will skip London cz I’ve been there. Prefer to explore more of cities outside London especially Edinburgh 🙂 Not too keen on visiting churches or normal structure, but love experiencing, sightseeing., nice places for pictures haha! Of course if the church is a super historical one then we don’t mind. Just hope to visit as many places out of London as possible within these 5 days (**sorry abit greedy haha!) By the way, a lil confused on point 3 & 4.

Much apologies for the last minute enquiries as my schedule is kinda tight over here.

Looking forward to your reply! 😀

Thanks, Cass.

6th September 2018 at 6:46 pm

Great to hear from you. So to answer your question on car hire, we usually try Enterprise and Priceline. I just checked, and both have the option to specify how many passengers, and they both have options for 6 people 🙂 You can see links under our car hire suggestions here:

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/travel-resources/#Car-Rental

For the itinerary in this post, a car is definitely going to work better than public transport. For six of you, a car will also be more cost effective, as tickets for six people, especially at this short notice, will definitely work out more expensive.

So for your trip, I would follow the itinerary pretty closely, but skipping London. Perhaps start with Stonehenge and the Cotwolds, then overnight in Oxford on your first night ( https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/6-ways-spend-day-oxford/ ). Second day you could explore Oxford then head north to Warwick. Overnight at Warwick, see the sights, then head further north, perhaps to York for your third night. Then on again, maybe a night in Durham, before your last night in Edinburgh?

Should give you something to work from anyway, without too much driving every day!

Hope this works for you! Have a great trip 🙂

Stella says

4th August 2018 at 5:10 pm

Thank you for providing such a great itinerary! My family and I are planning a trip for about 5 or 6 days total to the UK and the only set plan is to leave from London at the end of the trip. Now, we either want to go to Oxford and stay in that area for a few days, or go to Edinburgh and take a train directly to London. Which would you recommend? Thanks!

4th August 2018 at 5:14 pm

Hey Stella! My pleasure 🙂

Well, it really depends on what you want to see. From Oxford you have access to the Cotswolds and highlights like the Roman city of Bath, and of course, Stonehenge. Edinburgh is a bit bigger than Oxford so there is a bit more to see and do in the city, and then of course there are a lot of great day trips you can do to places like Loch Lomond, the highlands – even Loch Ness. So I guess it depends on if you want more cute villages, or more dramatic medieval city / landscapes!

I love both cities, so it’s hard to pick, but as a city I think Edinburgh has a bit more to offer, just because of the size. Hope this helps – have a great trip!

Cherry Vanderhoek says

22nd July 2018 at 5:49 pm

HI there, I was originally going to do your one week itinerary starting in London and ending in Glasgow but now due to flights I have to start in Gatwick and end in Gatwick. I love everything on your itinerary. I want to see quant villages, Stonehenge, Castles (medieval if possible) and I do love the look of that one house where they were inspired for Lord of the Rings, beautiful. I also wouldn’t mind seeing a nice market and a couple local pubs along the way. By the looks of things, based on your one week itinerary, I could do:

London- Stonehendge/Bath/Cotswolds/- Warwickshire/Peak District/Yorkshire

but than after that I would need to start rounding back down towards Gatwick. What do you suggest and where can I fit in Cambridge and possibly a medieval castle and a market? Or should I spend more time in London at the end?

Keep in mind I have been to London before and have seen alot of the main sites but definitely not all of them. How is the driving there, I will be on my own?

Thank you 🙂

22nd July 2018 at 9:35 pm

Well, Warwick has a castle, as does Oxford, so you might want to add in Oxford on your way out. You could do Cambridge on the way back to London from York, that would be quite easy. York is also home to a pile of medieval streets which should tick that box very nicely. Also, not to forget, London has a super old castle in the form of the Tower of London – although I suspect you might have been there already.

In terms of driving, the UK isn’t too bad once you get used to being on the left side (I have some tips for driving in the UK here: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/tips-for-driving-in-the-uk/ ). I’d definitely avoid driving in London though, it’s really slow and inefficient, parking is hard to find, and the congestion charge makes it really expensive! So definitely avoid that if you can.

Otherwise, have a great trip, and let me know if I can help any more!

4th June 2018 at 5:46 pm

I would love to follow your itinerary and would love to add 2-3 more days in it. Will be a family of 5 with 3 preteens. Are there any special considerations. Would like to see Stonehenge from road and would like to drove through Stratford on Avon. Would also like to add York to our trop and see Sycamore gsp. Is it worth going to Edinburgh in August for festival or should we avoid it? Any thoughts on where to stay town-wize in the Cotswolds and where would be the best placd to make a run for York and still ser Chatworth, Baddesly and the ruins? Thanks.

5th June 2018 at 8:56 am

Hey Joe! I guess it depends on the stamina of your kids 🙂 If they are very young then usually we advise cutting back a fair bit, but if they’re closer to teenage then they probably have more energy than everyone else 😉

Edinburgh is great in August if you are into the festival, but it is very very busy (and accommodation is harder to come by and more expensive), so if you’re not that excited about the festival, you might want to visit another location. For the Cotswolds, you can try Burton on the Water, Burford or Stow on the Wold 🙂 – or you could stay in Stratford which would give you a good run up to York.

Rocksy says

19th May 2018 at 3:28 pm

Thank you so much..

Rocksy Vidiaty says

16th May 2018 at 8:17 pm

Hi Laurence, thank you so much for your article. It helps me a lot in planning our UK big family trip next June. There will be 7 adults and 6 kids in this trip. Where would you suggest us to stay? And do we need to be a member of EH or NT in order to cut off the cost of entrance fee? Thank you for your advices..

regards, RFV

17th May 2018 at 6:03 pm

Hey Rocksy – my pleasure. Wow, that sounds like quite the trip 🙂 For the English Heritage and National Trust sites, if you’re a member then you get free admission. If you’re visiting from overseas, you can pick up the passes I link to which are cheaper than annual membership, and last for a shorter duration – normally long enough to cover a trip. My suggestion would be to look up the entry prices for the attractions you are interested in, add them up, and see if the pass would save you the money or not.

For accommodation, for such a large group my suggestion would be to look at larger apartment rentals as that will give you more flexibility as a larger group. Hotels are an option, but you would likely have to book quite a few rooms, so apartments might be a better option. I have a list of accommodation sites that specialise in apartment rentals that might be a good place to start, you can see that here: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/alternatives-to-airbnb/

Have an amazing trip, and do let us know how it goes – and do feel free to send us any more questions of course 🙂

18th May 2018 at 10:36 am

Thanks Laurence. We plan to rent 2 big cars and do our self-drive UK trip. We will follow some of your route and modify the rest. So our route will be Heathrow – Stonehenge – Bath – Cotswold (in one day) -Baddesley Clinton-Chatsworth (in one day). From here we have 2 options, either go to York (in one day) – Cambridge – Oxford (in one day) -Windsor -London (in 3 days), or go to Manchester-Liverpool-Snowdonia (in 2 days) -Oxford-Windsor-London (in 3 days). We have 8 days in total. Can you please give some advice? In our group there will be 80 years old lady to 2 years old boy..

Thanks in advance Regards, Rocksy

18th May 2018 at 9:10 pm

Sounds like a great trip! Well, I don’t think you’ll have enough time in 2 days to do Manchester, Liverpool and Snowdonia, so my suggestion would be the first option you suggest, which will give you a bit more time. I’d also add that Cambridge and Oxford are fairly similar, so you might prefer to just pick one of the two 🙂

Crystal says

9th May 2018 at 6:57 pm

HI. I was wondering if you had a detailed map of this 1 week UK itinerary. Thank you

10th May 2018 at 8:52 am

Hi Crystal! That is an excellent point – I have been trying to add maps to my itineraries and seem to have missed this one. I’ll add one in as soon as I can and will respond to your comment again when I have done so – thanks for letting me know 🙂

Dylan Wright says

8th May 2018 at 10:28 am

Thank you for the article. But I would like to ask a question. I want to rent a car, but I’m under 25. What is the UK policy for renting a car to students?

8th May 2018 at 12:33 pm

There’s no UK wide policy on age restrictions for car rentals – it’s varies from company to company. I would advise checking individual car rental services like Enterprise, Hertz, Sixt etc. and seeing what their policy is. Most companies will have a surcharge for drivers younger than 25, but it should still be possible to rent a car. I have more information on my driving in the UK post, which you can eee here: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/tips-for-driving-in-the-uk/

Kathleen says

27th April 2018 at 2:01 am

I’m so happy to have found this! My husband and I are planning a one week trip this June coming from the US and this sounds perfect. I am just trying to figure out how to fit everything in along with the driving. Several things don’t open until 10 or 11 am and then close early, which doesn’t leave much time. For example, you mention staying at Fountains Abbey through sunset, but the website says it closes at 18:00. Can you stay on the grounds past closing? I’m also trying to decide if it would be worth stopping for a night between Newcastle and Edinburgh if we have time which gives us more time in Edinburgh. Any suggestions? Thanks

27th April 2018 at 9:12 am

Hi Kathleen!

I’m glad to have been able to help! Opening times can be a bit of a challenge for sure, and they vary by season – so you’ll definitely have to plan around them. It also depends what time of year you visit depending on the sunset – in June the sun won’t set until around 10pm, in December, it’s more like 4pm! With Fountains Abbey, when I spoke to the staff there they said you were fine to stay after official closing hours, there’s just no entry after those times. it’s a huge park, so they’d struggle to get everyone out anyway! For an overnight stop between Edinburgh and Newcastle, there are a few options, perhaps Alnwick would be a good option?

27th April 2018 at 5:48 pm

Thank you so much for answering my questions! I have one more for you. My husband is very leery of trying to drive since we are used to driving on the other side of the road. If we plan on picking up a rental car at heathrow on our way out of London on day 3 and returning it either in Newcastle (to take the train to Edinburgh) or at the Edinburgh airport at our arrival there, how much city driving would there be? The thought of getting confused in a roundabout scare him 🙂 Thanks so. much! Kathleen

27th April 2018 at 5:52 pm

My pleasure Kathleen 😀 The remaining cities are not really that big (London is by far the worst to drive in), but I would say that the UK doesn’t have quite the interstate system of the USA, so there will still be the odd roundabout to deal with. But if you take your time (and make sure to hire an automatic if you’re not used to driving stick!) then you should be ok. I also have a guide to driving in the UK he might find helpful, which I wrote from the perspective of someone coming from the US in mind 🙂 You definitely won’t need a car in Edinburgh. I would also advise bringing a GPS – even google maps with an offline version of the UK downloaded onto it will make your travels a lot easier.

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/tips-for-driving-in-the-uk/

26th April 2018 at 7:17 pm

Dear Laurence and Jessica, this all sounds pretty amazing. I have lived in the UK for over ten years (Southampton and London) and I totally agree with the itinerary you’re suggesting. I was wondering if you can give me any ideas on the following: my fiance and I will be in York in June for work and then have about six days to travel around the country. We want to spend the two last days in London as we need to catch our plane back to Australia. We’ve been debating whether we should explore the Scottish Highlands or go down to Cornwall, both of which are places we haven’t visited before. Or are we missing out on a better itinerary for our timeframe? I admit I very much like your one week in the UK although I have visited most of these places before…Any ideas? Thank you!

26th April 2018 at 7:32 pm

Thanks for your comment. Let me see if I can help 🙂 My personal preference would be to go to the Scottish Highlands. I’m not sure how you are travelling exactly, either by car or public transport, but your best option would be to take a car – either take the train to Inverness and hire one, or drive up from York. For scenery, my suggestion would be to head to the west coast – perhaps Glencoe, the Isle of Skye, and then up the west coast towards Durness. That part of the country is home to some of the most spectacular scenery in the UK. Definitely check out my North Coast 500 itinerary ( https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/7-day-north-coast-500-camping-itinerary/ ) for pointers on that, as well as our Isle of Skye photography guide ( https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/skye-photography-locations-scotland/ ).

One other option, I’m not sure if you’ve been to the Lake District, but if you didn’t want to drive so much then that’s also a good option from York 🙂

Have a great trip – let me know if you have any more questions!

8th May 2018 at 5:30 pm

Dear Laurence,

Many thanks for your prompt response and apologies it took me forever to get back to you! We will be renting a car to do our travelling. Lake District is currently one of our options and we are also considering the Yorkshire moors as a closer option before heading down to London. Any preference between the two (Lake District vs Yorkshire moors)? Thank you!

10th May 2018 at 8:56 am

No need to apologise! My personal preference would be the Lake District – it’s a really beautiful part of the UK. The only thing is it’s likely to be a bit busier than the Yorkshire moors, so if it’s peace and quiet you are after, the Yorkshire Moors are also very beautiful and likely to be a bit less busy! Hope this helps a bit 🙂

H Singh says

15th April 2018 at 9:41 am

Dear Laurence and Jessica, All of this is wonderful and very helpful info. What would you suggest to see and do in UK for a family of four on a net budget of around 1500 GBP. Tickets and Visa to UK I shall take care separately. We plan to visit in July and start the itinerary by travelling into London Please advise. Thanks. HS

15th April 2018 at 2:20 pm

Thanks for your message! You will be pleased to hear that I have just today published a detailed post that covers the cost of travel in the UK. This is based on two people, but you should be able to use the numbers to help inform your budget. You can see that here: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/cost-travel-uk/

How long are you in the UK for and what are you interested in?

15th April 2018 at 4:41 pm

Dear Lawrence,

Thanks for your prompt reply. Your article related to the costs is very timely for me, I am looking forward to a short UK holiday in July with family (me, wife, teen son, pre-teen daughter) on a 1500 GBP budget (airfare, visas separate). Seeing the costs in the article, wondering how to make it possible!!! Any advice will be very useful to me!

18th April 2018 at 6:29 am

My advice would be to book as much in advance as you can – especially train tickets or plane tickets are much cheaper if you book them in advance. For accommodation, try some of the alternative lodging options ( https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/alternatives-to-airbnb/ ) – which might help you save money, especially travelling as a family. I hope this helps a bit.

19th April 2018 at 6:57 pm

I’ll look into the link you provided for accommodation, as well as note your advice on advance bookings. Thank you Lawrence.

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Let me know when there's a reply to my comment (just replies to your comment, no other e-mails, we promise!)

Subscribe to our monthly Newsletter where we share our latest travel news and tips. This also makes you eligible to enter our monthly giveaways!

We only ask for your e-mail so we can verify you are human and if requested notify you of a reply. To do this, we store your data as outlined in our privacy policy . Your e-mail will not be published or used for any other reason other than those outlined above.

Boxy Colonial On the Road

Family RV Travel with Four Boys and Three Dogs

Planning a First Trip to the UK with Kids and Teens: Our 10 Day Itinerary

July 14, 2019 by kokotg Leave a Comment

Before I get into recapping all the stuff we did in England on our trip, I want to talk a bit about the planning process and what worked and didn’t work well for us. This was our first trip overseas as a family, and I certainly don’t claim to be an expert, but I always find it helpful to read about how other people approach trip planning when I’m doing it myself and trying to nail down the elusive perfect itinerary for a new location.

In summer of 2018, my in-laws made the very generous offer to take the whole extended family (our family plus my husband’s sister’s family) to Ireland in summer of 2019. This left us with a year to plan, and we used all of that time. I’ll talk about Ireland planning later on; here I’ll stick with the ten days in England that we added on for just our immediate family at the beginning of the trip.

So first up I’ll just give you our final itinerary: where we went and what we did. Then I’ll talk about how we settled on it and how it worked out for us.

Day 0:  Atlanta to London

This actually bled over into Day 1, as we left our house at 9 AM our time and arrived at London City Airport, 3 flights later, at about 8:30 AM London time/3:30 AM EST.

Day 1: London

We were very tired, but we couldn’t check into our Airbnb until afternoon, so we dragged ourselves to the National Maritime Museum for a couple of hours.

Checked in to Airbnb and tried, with mixed success, to stay awake until a reasonable bedtime.

Day 2: London

Morning: British Museum

Lunch at Museum Tavern

Afternoon: Museum of London

Day 3: London

Vauxhall Farms

Westminster Abbey

Late lunch/early dinner at the Laughing Halibut

Treasure Trail in Westminster area

Day 4: London

Victoria and Albert Museum

Lunch at Honest Burger

Hyde Park/Diana Memorial Playground

Day 5: London

Tower of London

Day 6: London to Bath

Pick up rental car at Heathrow

Arrive in Bath and check into hotel

Dinner at Slug+Lettuce

Day 7: Bath

Roman Baths

Bath Treasure Trail

Dinner at Cosy Club

Day 8: Bath to Bakewell (Peak District)

No. 1 Royal Crescent museum in Bath

drive to Bakewell and check in to Airbnb

Day 9: Bakewell

Old House Museum

Bakewell Treasure Trail

Dinner at The Woodyard

Day 10: Bakewell

walk to Chatsworth House (bus back)

Try Bakewell Pudding

Day 11: Bakewell to Dublin!

Okay, so now for the ambitious part where I get into how we put the itinerary together and planned the trip in general.

Deciding where to go

The main decision here was whether to spend all of our time in London (with maybe some day trips to Stonehenge, et. al.) or to split the time between two or more different areas. And, as you can see, we opted for the latter. This was partially because staying in London was just far more expensive than anywhere else, but mostly because we didn’t know when we’d be back and we wanted to see as much as we could. Or as much as we could without packing up and going somewhere new every night, at any rate, because that’s not how we like to travel.

We did still spend five nights in London, which gave us a good amount of time to settle in, get over our jet lag, and hit a lot of highlights. Then we did two nights in Bath, with a stop on the way to see Stonehenge (which Dave REALLY wanted to do) and then three nights in Bakewell, in the Peak District. I can’t remember how we landed on the Peak District. I think I wanted something a little less obvious (and maybe less crowded) than, say, the Lake District or the Cotswolds, and I thought it might position us better for getting to Dublin after (although I’m not sure it really did). But, really, the kids and I had never been to England at all and Dave had been only briefly in college, so we could have gone pretty much anywhere and had plenty to do and see. As it was, we were really happy with all three of our stops and with how much time we allowed for each one.

Transportation: Getting there and getting around

I always expect living right by the busiest airport in the world to mean lots of cheap, direct flights, but it doesn’t seem to work out that way most of the time. For example, it was MUCH cheaper for us to fly out of Boston to Ireland or England than it would have been to fly straight from Atlanta. Our trip over ended up being three separate flights: Atlanta to Boston, Boston to Dublin, then finally Dublin to London. This was a lot of flights.

I was very nervous about my first transAtlantic flight, but it turned out to be no big deal. It was very smooth, and I caught up on some Doctor Who. The flight to Boston was much bumpier and less pleasant.

Getting around London via the tube is super easy and efficient. We landed at London City Airport–a tiny airport that you probably won’t see unless you’re taking a short flight from, say, Dublin like we were–and took the Docklands Light Rail first to the National Maritime Museum in Greenwich and then on to London. Our rental house was close to two different Underground stations, so it was very easy to get wherever we needed to go. Very often there was a train arriving right when we got to the station; I don’t think we ever waited more than ten minutes, and usually it was much less. It was definitely the best and easiest to navigate public transportation system I’ve ever used.

We rented a car at Heathrow when we left London. Dave lost his license (and credit card) on, we would discover eventually, the very first flight to Boston. We managed to have a replacement sent while we were in Dublin, so he drove in Ireland, but it was all me in England. I can say confidently that if I had known that was going to happen, we would have stayed in London the whole time and not rented a car at all. But I did fine! I didn’t hit anything or anyone (except the curb a few times the first day)! The wrong side of the road and car thing is not the hardest thing to deal with; it’s the tiny roads you often encounter in small towns and rural areas. That and the smaller than I’d like parking lots and spaces (I’m a nervous parker under the best of circumstances).

But the single worst part was driving in Bath at the end of my first day of driving. I had triumphantly taken us all to Stonehenge and then most of the way to Bath without incident. Then we took a wrong turn just before we got into Bath. “This CAN’T be right!” I shrieked as I started driving down a road about the width of the average bike path in the US. It was not right. We had to get turned around and make a very tricky turn to get headed in the right direction again, and it was all downhill from there. First I somehow managed to activate a setting on the rental car that prevented the car from going over 20 miles per hour, only it took me a long time to figure out that it was that and not just a suddenly broken car, so the people behind me LOVED that. Then we got into Bath itself, which is a very old city with a maze of tiny one way roads and a ton of traffic. We were just trying to find the carpark where we were going to leave the car while we were staying there, but it took way longer than it should have owing to our less than direct route. We finally made it, and I was very, very happy.

So narrow roads and all that aside, renting a car great if you want to see areas outside of London. We considered getting around with public transportation, but there really wasn’t a reasonable (time or money-wise) way to, for example, get from London to Stonehenge and then on to Bath. If you’re coming from the US or Canada, everything in England will feel very close together. I was nervous about gas prices in Europe, but honestly, between how short the drives were and how fuel-efficient the cars were (even the big 8 passenger van we had in England), it wasn’t a big deal at all. We pre-paid 70something pounds for the rental car in England and wished we hadn’t because we ended up using only about half a tank in the 5 days we had it (we were told it would save money to do it that way if we returned it with less than a quarter of a tank). We used it exclusively for traveling between towns; once we got to our destination we parked and explored mostly on foot.

And then we dropped off the rental car at the Manchester airport after leaving Bakewell and took three trains and a ferry to get to Dublin. We went back and forth about the ferry vs. flying to Dublin, but finally decided that it would be fun to take the ferry and save a little money over flying and that we were really getting plenty of airplane time in on this trip already. I’ll try to do a separate post about our Rail Sail experience. To sum up: the ferry itself was great, but the transportation on either end was a little logistically challenging.

Surviving the first day:

If you fly from the US to England, you’ll very likely arrive early in the morning, which is to say in the middle of the night according to your body. And this after a very long, tiring day of travel. We didn’t feel like doing anything except sleeping when we landed, but we couldn’t check in to our Airbnb for several more hours. We picked the National Maritime Museum for our first day activity for a few reasons: it was more or less on the way from the airport and wouldn’t add a lot of extra travel time; it was free, so we wouldn’t feel like we’d wasted a lot of money if we were too tired to enjoy it; it was something that we’d  like  to see but didn’t consider an absolute must see–so, again, we wouldn’t feel like we’d missed out by being too tired to explore thoroughly. This worked well for us. We sort of wandered aimlessly through the museum, saw some cool stuff through an exhausted fog, and spent a long time at the little restaurant drinking coffee and hot chocolate.

We left as soon as we could to get to our Airbnb close to check in time, and then Gus and Abe immediately fell asleep on the couch:

But we managed to wake them up after a little while, head out to the store for some dinner stuff (I think we did rotisserie chickens that first night), and keep everyone up until around 8 so we could get back on schedule. Which mostly worked. The first couple of days we were still pretty tired, though.

Oh! Ideally you’ll sleep on the plane to make that first day a little easier. But our plane from Boston took off around 6 PM, which isn’t really our bedtime, and landed around midnight our time (which is closer to our bedtime). So it wasn’t really the best window for sleep. Some of us slept a little, but certainly no one got in anything resembling a night’s sleep. Here’s what my Fitbit looked like that week; see if you can spot which night we traveled and which night was our first in London!

Where we stayed:

Finding places to stay with six people, particularly in Europe, is not always easy. I didn’t get very far into looking at hotels in London before realizing the prices for the two or even three rooms we’d need were out of reach. So an Airbnb it was! You can spend plenty on an Airbnb, too, though. We kept things relatively affordable by expanding our search outside of the typical tourist areas (while still making sure to find somewhere with good transportation options).

We ended up staying in a townhouse in Kennington (not Kensington! Important distinction when it comes to price!) It was in a nice neighborhood that was convenient to everything but not at all touristy. We could walk to some things (Westminster Abbey/Big Ben, the London Eye), or it was a 5 minute walk to the closest Tube station (or a 10 minute walk to Vauxhall, which was sometimes more convenient, depending on our destination) for anything else. Plenty of shopping and restaurants in the area. And the house itself was lovely, with 3 bedrooms, laundry, and a full kitchen. It came in under $300/night after all the fees.

View from the window:

For Bath, we made good use of our Chase Sapphire credit card points and booked a 2 bedroom apartment at the Halcyon Hotel . We loved it here: great central location, everything within easy walking distance, nice apartment, and it came with a “breakfast hamper” which means there was tons of food that was refreshed every day (cereal, muffins, coffee, milk, orange juice, eggs, bacon…it was magical!) This was our view:

Couple of things to note: there are several flights of stairs to walk up to get to the apartment. That’s how you get that view! There’s no dedicated parking, but there is a car park with long term parking a few blocks away. It’s 15 pounds/day, so be sure to factor that in to pricing if you’re planning to drive. And lastly, there’s no office onsite, so you’ll need to make sure to let them know when you’re planning to check in so they can make arrangements to let you in. We were running late (see above re: getting lost on the way to Bath) and had no data on our phones, so we didn’t see the e-mail they sent about how to get in once we missed our check-in window. This caused a bit of panic, but eventually we found someone at the bar downstairs who was able to help us out.

Then it was back to Airbnb-ing it in Bakewell . That’s actually how we wound up in Bakewell: I searched for Airbnbs that would fit all of us in the Peak District and Bakewell had the best one I found. This was again very centrally located and and easy walk to anything in the town. It was a tiny little place spread over 3 floors, but everything we needed for the few days we stayed. And it was only $130/night including fees!

Our only issue was that tiny parking space you see right in front of the house. I didn’t think there was any way to fit the big van we’d rented in it (and there was a smallish gate opening to get into the parking area and other cars parked right across from that space). Our host came over to make sure we’d gotten settled and direct us to some free on street parking at the edge of town….and when he did this he swung expertly into that tiny space in his big SUV like it was nothing at all! But I’m not experienced with UK parking, so I was happy to leave it outside of town and walk. There did not seem to be any overnight paid parking available anywhere in Bakewell (there are several car parks, but as far as we could tell they all prohibited overnight parking), which was a little frustrating.

How we plan:

I’ve given you the final itinerary meaning what we actually did. But, of course, it bears little resemblance to the first draft itinerary or, in fact, to the proposed itinerary the day we arrived in London. I’m an obsessive planner, and I love nothing more than spending winter evenings planning every detail of summer trips. But I believe that the key to being a happy obsessive planner is being flexible when it comes to the actual execution of said obsessive plans.

A bit more about what the whole process looks like (I’ll focus on London, for simplicity’s sake): First I made a list of all the things I wanted to see in London, divided into “must sees” and “maybes.” Then Dave broke out the map (virtually speaking) and we started to group things together by geographic area and figure out what things it would make sense to do on the same day. Then we added potential restaurants in the area for each day. Dave likes spreadsheets, so he put all of this into a spreadsheet. I don’t like spreadsheets (at least not making them), so I did a more narrative day by day with more extensive notes about each day’s plan. Then when we got to London everything went totally out the window! Just kidding. But things did get moved around quite a bit depending on our moods and the weather, and we ended up doing way less than what we had on the itinerary (the itinerary is intentionally more aspirational than realistic).

How the obsessive planning worked out for us/what we’d change:

We were all pretty happy with our London experience. I wish we’d managed to see more but 1. I always wish we’d managed to see more and 2. We were really tired the first couple of days. Beyond that, a few fairly random notes:

*The British Museum was one of the first things we did, and we weren’t quite prepared for how SUPER crowded it was. We were also worried that everything in London was going to be that crowded and relieved to find out that was not the case. In retrospect, we might have saved the British Museum for later in the trip when we were a little more well rested and able to get an earlier start to beat the crowds. Going later in the afternoon might have been another option.

*We had tickets (free) for the Sky Garden, which we’d planned to see as an alternative to the very pricey London Eye. We’d booked the tickets weeks in advance, but when the day arrived it was rainy and cold; we’d spent the morning shivering at the Tower of London and just wanted to get inside…so we skipped it, reasoning we likely wouldn’t be able to see much anyway through the clouds. I have some regrets about not seeing London from up high, but given that the tickets needed to be booked in advance, I’m not sure how we could have done things differently.

*The Victoria and Albert was the surprise hit in London. It was like a way less crowded British Museum! It was a last minute addition to the itinerary; originally we’d planned on doing the Natural History Museum instead, but Gus really doesn’t like taxidermy, so we thought this might be a better plan.

*We did the Tower of London all wrong. We somehow ended up going on the most miserable day of the trip, weather-wise, which made things unpleasant. And then we had big plans to get there right when it opened, only we went on a Monday when it opened an hour later than usual, which meant pretty much everyone got there at the same time and the lines and crowds were huge.

A few kid-specific tips:

*You’ll note that our itinerary was pretty museum-heavy. But we found that nearly every museum in London had some way or other to make for kid-friendly visits. I’ll talk more about specifics as I get to individual posts, but, for example: the British Museum has scavenger hunts you can print out before you come. The Tower of London has an app you can download with “missions” to complete while you’re there. The Victoria and Albert has  great  backpacks you can check out with tons of activities in them. And most places we encountered with audio tours had a kid or family friendly option (Westminster Abbey, Stonehenge, the Roman Baths).

*I mentioned that we did several Treasure Trails in the itinerary. I came across these in some blog post or other pre-trip and ordered a few because they weren’t too expensive. These are scavenger hunts that take you all over a town or part of a city solving clues. I wasn’t sure how much we’d get into them, but they turned out to be a great addition to the trip. I always feel like we should spend more time just wandering around when we’re in new cities, and this was kind of a way to do that but with a little direction so it didn’t feel aimless (which equals fewer complain-y kids) and so that we were actually seeing very cool stuff–little tucked away streets, pretty parks, etc. The theming (a treasure hunt! a spy mission!) was VERY loose, but no one much cared. Super fun. I wish I could find something similar for everywhere we visit!

*In the UK, Ireland, and Canada, we’ve found family rates at museums and attractions to be very common. Make sure to check for these wherever you go! And if your kids are too old to be kids for admission purposes, most places at least have a student rate.

I’ll end this (very long!) post here. Much more to come about specific places we went!

Any questions about things I’ve left out? Any planning tips of your own you’d like to share?

maybe you would like to pin this?

Share this:

Leave a reply cancel reply.

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Notify me of follow-up comments by email.

Notify me of new posts by email.

CommentLuv badge

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

UK Travel Planning

See the best of Britain by train (2 week itinerary + maps & tips)

By: Author Tracy Collins

Posted on Last updated: April 19, 2024

Follow our 14-day itinerary to see the best of Britain by train including top destinations in England, Wales and Scotland. We’ve done all the planning so you don’t have to!

Do you have 14 days to explore Britain but are struggling to put together an itinerary? Not sure what places to include or how to get around? You will find everything you need to know to see the best of Britain by train in this article.

We have included 5 of Britain’s most popular destinations in 3 countries – London, Bath, Cardiff, Edinburgh, and York with the option of choosing between 2 others -the Lake District and Liverpool – on days 7 and 8.

For each destination included in the itinerary, you will find recommendations of what to do and see, accommodation suggestions, and logistics plus practical details and tips to ensure your 14-day train trip around England, Wales and Scotland is everything you dream of.

I have also included a map illustrating the points of travel, the distance between destinations, and the estimated travel time for each leg of the journey.

Good to know! For non-UK citizens we recommend purchasing a BritRail Pass or the Eurail Global Rail Pass for this 2-week itinerary – click to find out more about BritRail passes & Eurail Global Rail Passes or here to read our comparison guide.

Britain by train - 14 day itinerary map.

Days 1 – 3 London

Day 4 london – bath, day 5 bath (day trip – cotswolds or stonehenge), day 6 bath – cardiff, day 7 cardiff – liverpool or lake district, day 8 – liverpool or lake district, day 9 liverpool or lake district to edinburgh, day 10 edinburgh, day 11 edinburgh (or day trip), scotland by rail itinerary, day 12 edinburgh to york, day 13 – york, day 14 – york to london, listen to our introduction to uk train travel podcast, what train cards or passes are recommended for this uk train travel itinerary, where can i buy train tickets, what do i need to know about travelling the uk by train, can i take luggage on uk trains.

  • Are any of the UK's scenic train routes included in this itinerary?

Enjoy your UK train travel adventure

See britain by train with our 14 day itinerary.

A minimum of 3 days in London is recommended especially if it is your first visit to the city . This will give you enough time to see the main London landmarks and tick some attractions off your London bucket list.

This 14-day Best of Britain by train itinerary begins with Days 1/2 and 3 in London and ends on Day 14 back in the capital. Depending on your flight or onward travel itinerary, you may have some flexibility to add a few more sights in London .

London Day 1

I recommend spending your first day visiting some of the most popular London attractions, landmarks, and sights.

If you are feeling energetic a self-directed walking tour of the main sights located in central London is one option.

Alternatively, consider booking a guided tour. We recommend the London In a Day: Tower of London, Westminster Abbey & Changing of the Guard tour from Take Walks . This comprehensive tour is dedicated to the quintessential sights of the city: Westminster Abbey, Tower Bridge, Changing of the Guard, a Thames river cruise, and a full Tower of London tour with access to the Crown Jewels.

If you prefer to take it easy on your first day (don’t discount the effects of jetlag), a hop-on hop-off bus tour is another option and a great way to orient yourself with the city.

London Day 2

If you did not visit the Tower of London on Day 1 I would recommend starting your morning by exploring this ancient and historic landmark.

Afterwards, walk to the 43rd floor of the Walkie-Talkie building for lunch at the Sky Garden (London’s highest public garden). Entry to the Sky Garden is free but it is essential to book tickets ahead of your visit.

In the vicinity of the Sky Garden are 4 other landmarks and buildings worth visiting – St Dunstan in the East Church Garden, Pudding Lane, St Paul’s Cathedral, and Leadenhall Market.

After exploring the area jump on the Central Line at St Paul’s changing at Holborn for the Piccadilly Line to Covent Garden. Enjoy the street entertainment, shops, and attractions around Covent Garden before dinner and a show.

London Day 3

Today I recommend visiting the British Museum in the morning. The museum is always busy so try to arrive as early in the day as possible. I recommend purchasing a ticket that enables you to skip the line so you don’t waste precious vacation time in a queue.

If you are visiting with children we recommend this private customised family-friendly tour of the museum with a special children’s guide. During the 2 hour tour, you will enjoy favourite displays such as the Egyptian mummies and the Rosetta Stone with your guide.

For your final afternoon in the city, I have a few alternatives depending on your interests.

If you enjoy shopping head to Harrods. If you enjoy history a trip to Churchill’s War Rooms is a great option. If you have young kids head to London Zoo or – if they are up for another museum – the Natural History Museum in South Kensington. If you have visited London previously and are seeking something different I highly recommend jumping on the Thames Clipper to Greenwich.

For those of you with specific interests, this may also be a great time to do a themed tour – Harry Potter, James Bond, Jack the Ripper are some examples of the themed walking tours available in London .

These are just a few ideas for your first 3 days in London – please see our detailed itinerary posts for more.

View of 2 people standing with umbrellas opposite the Houses of Parliament in London.

On Day 4 depart London for the South West of England and one of England’s most beautiful and oldest cities – Bath!

For centuries Bath’s naturally warm and mineral-rich waters attracted those who sought its curative powers and potential for rejuvenation.

Roman Baths constructed nearly 2000 years ago, stunning Georgian architecture, a museum dedicated to Jane Austen and numerous boutiques, independent shops and tea houses are just some of the attractions of the city.

Tip – Take an early train from London and you will have most of the day to explore.

🌟 Highlights of Bath

  • Roman Baths
  • Royal Crescent
  • Jane Austen Centre

Read more – One day Bath Itinerary – follow our one day in Bath itinerary to see the cities sights, attractions and landmarks.

Read more – Bath Travel Guide – our complete guide to visiting Bath including accommodation suggestions, where to eat, and what to read before you visit.

🗺 Logistics London – Bath

  • London to Bath travel time by train is approximately 1 hour 20 minutes  
  • Depart London Paddington (Platform 5 typically) arrives Bath Spa (Platform 1 typically)
  • This is a direct train service with Great Western Railways

🏨 Accommodation options in Bath

  • Best luxury spa hotel in Bath –  The Gainsborough Bath Spa  is a luxury 5* hotel and the only UK hotel to have access to naturally heated thermal waters within its Spa Village.
  • Best mid-range hotel in Bath –  Eight  is a small independent boutique hotel in the centre of Bath.
  • Best budget option in Bath –  Grays  is a boutique B&B situated in an imposing semi-detached Victorian villa located 15 minutes from the centre of Bath.
  • Find more options in my guide to the best places to stay in Bath

Roman Baths in Bath.

On day 5 you have a few options. Bath is close to two of England’s most popular destinations and I highly recommend including at least one of them in your itinerary.

Your options are

Spend another day exploring Bath OR

  • Take a day tour from Bath and explore the beautiful Cotswold villages and/or Stonehenge OR
  • Travel independently taking the train from Bath to Salisbury and catch the Stonehenge tour bus from there.

We will explore these options in more detail so you can decide which you prefer.

A row of cottages in Bibury UK.

☂️ Day tour options from Bath

I have picked the best day tour options to the Cotswolds available from Bath. Stonehenge is also included in some of these tours.

If you decide to include both destinations (Cotswolds & Stonehenge) in one tour bear in mind that you will have less tim e to explore the Cotswolds but this may be the best option if you really want to see both.

It is possible to travel to Stonehenge independently using public transport from Bath to Salisbury (and onto Stonehenge) but I have included some day tours too so you can choose the best option for your needs.

Day tours from Bath to the Cotswolds

  • ‘Stonehenge & Secret England’ Private Full-Day Tour from Bath – Private tour to Stonehenge then personalize your sightseeing to visit castles or gardens, or take a film location tour of medieval villages featured in ‘Harry Potter,’ ‘Downton Abbey,’ and other hits.
  • Full-day private Cotswolds tour from Bath – Explore idyllic villages and famous Cotswold towns on this 9-hour full-day tour. This will give you a wonderful overview and experience of what the Cotswolds is all about.

Day tour from Bath including Stonehenge

  • Stonehenge, Avebury stone circles & stunning Cotswold Villages – Full-day tour which includes the beautiful villages of Lacock and Castle Combe.

Day tours from Bath to Stonehenge

  • Stonehenge Private Tour (Half-Day Tour from Bath) – Includes a detailed guide to Stonehenge and private end-to-end transportation from your Bath hotel.
  • Bespoke private tours of Stonehenge and Avebury by car with a local guide – Half or full-day tour to the prehistoric stone circles at Stonehenge and Avebury.

Stonehenge in England.

🗺 Logistics – Bath to Salisbury (Stonehenge)

  • Bath to Salisbury travel time by train is approximately 1 hour  
  • Depart Bath Spa arrives in Salisbury 

Britain by train - 14 day itinerary map showing day 6 of 14 - Bath to Cardiff.

On day 6 hop on the train for a journey of just over an hour to a new country – Wales . The Welsh capital of Cardiff is the buzzing centre of this Celtic nation.

Crammed with cultural hotspots, charming Victorian architecture, a rich history, impressive castles, and modern urban hangouts, Cardiff has a whole heap of things for visitors to do and see.

🌟 Highlights of Cardiff

  • Cardiff Castle
  • Sail Cardiff Bay
  • Stroll the Centenary Walk through the city
  • Take a themed Dr Who or Gavin & Stacey tour

Read more – Things to do in Cardiff

🗺 Logistics Bath – Cardiff

  • Bath to Cardiff travel time by train is approximately 1 hour 12 minutes  
  • Depart Bath Spa (Platform 1 typically) arrives Cardiff Central (Platform 3/4 typically)

🏨 Accommodation options on Cardiff

  • Best luxury spa hotel in Cardiff – Voco St David’s Hotel is a waterfront hotel with balconies, bay views, and a luxury spa.
  • Best mid-range hotels in Cardiff – 4*  Hotel Indigo Cardiff  offers modern accommodation and a rather splendid Marco Pierre White restaurant!
  • Best budget option in Cardiff – Hotel Number One Hundred   is a boutique-style B&B offering superb value for money.

Cardiff Castle

On Day 7 you can choose to either spend a few days exploring the city of Liverpool or alternatively a rural experience in the beautiful Lake District.

If you are a fan of the Beatles Liverpool is the must-visit destination. Take the Magical Mystery tour and visit the childhood homes of Paul and John before dancing the night away at the Cavern Club.

Alternatively head to the Lake District and explore its stunning lakes and mountains, quaint towns and villages , from your base in Windermere .

Britain by train - 14 day itinerary map showing day 7 of 14 - Cardiff to Liverpool.

🗺 Logistics Cardiff – Liverpool

  • Cardiff Central to Liverpool Lime Street travel time by train is approximately 3 hours 25 mins.   
  • Depart Cardiff Central (Platform 1/2 typically) arrives Crewe (platform 6 change trains and depart at platform 6) to Liverpool Lime Street (Platform 9 typically)
  • There is one change required at Crewe. Transport for Wales trains from Cardiff to Crewe and then Crewe to Liverpool on Avanti West Coast

🏨 Accommodation in Liverpool

  • Best Liverpool Hotel for Beatles fans –  The Hard Days Night Hotel  is decorated with Beatles memorabilia and located around the corner from the Cavern Club – our number one choice when staying in Liverpool.
  • Best mid-range hotel in Liverpool –  The Titanic Hotel is located in a historic warehouse in the UNESCO World Heritage Stanley Dock. Spacious rooms in a unique setting.
  • Best budget option in Liverpool –  The Resident Liverpool   offers affordable accommodation in a central location.

⭐️ Find more options in my area & accommodation guide to Liverpool

Lake District

Britain by train - 14 day itinerary map showing day 7 of 14 - Cardiff to Lake District.

🗺 Logistics Cardiff – Lake District

  • Cardiff to Windermere in the Lake District train time is approximately 6 hours with 2 changes required.  
  • Depart Cardiff arrives Windermere
  • Change at Crewe (arrive and depart platform 6) and catch the Avanti West Coast to Lancaster (arrive and depart from platform 3) on Northern Trains to Windermere (Platform 1).

🏨 Accommodation in the Lake District

  • Best luxury hotel in Windermere –  Macdonald Old English Hotel and Spa  is a luxury 5* hotel and spa perched on the shores of Lake Windermere.
  • Best mid-range hotel in Windermere –  Cragwood Country House Hotel is located in stunning gardens on the shores of Lake Windermere. It offers spacious rooms, exceptional food, and a relaxing experience for guests.
  • Best budget (ish) hotel in Windermere – The 3* Windermere Manor Hotel is an 1850’s stone manor house offering dog-friendly accommodation.

Tip – More accommodation options can be found in my guide to the best places to stay in Lake Windermere

Liverpool versus the Lake District illustration.

🌟 Highlights of Liverpool

  • Albert Dock
  • Beatles Tour
  • Tate Modern
  • Enjoy a football match 

Read more – Liverpool Travel Guide (including tips, itinerary & map

Statue of the Beatles.

🌟 Highlights of the Lake District

  • Boat trip across Windermere
  • Take a Hike and enjoy stunning views
  • Visit Hill Top the former home of Beatrix Potter
  • Enjoy a drink in an English pub  

Read more – Lake District Travel Guide

Train in the Lake District.

On day 9 travel from Liverpool or the Lake District to Edinburgh. Journey time from both departure points is around 3 – 4 hours so you will arrive in plenty of time to start exploring the sights of Edinburgh.

Top tip – Book a hotel near the train station, drop your bags, and head out to the Royal Mile and soak in the atmosphere of the Scottish capital. This hop-on-hop-off bus pass is great to explore Edinburgh at your own pace with a 3-route tour ticket.

🗺 Logistics – Liverpool to Edinburgh

  • Liverpool Lime Street to Edinburgh travel time by train is approximately 3 hours 45 minutes  
  • Depart Liverpool Lime Street arrives Edinburgh
  • One change at Preston in Lancashire.

🗺 Logistics – Windermere to Edinburgh

  • Windermere to Edinburgh travel time by train is approximately 3 hours 10 minutes.
  • Depart Windermere arrives Edinburgh Waverley
  • Depending on time of travel 1 or 2 changes at Oxenholme in the Lake District (and possibly an additional change at Carlisle) .

🏨 Accommodation in Edinburgh

  • Best luxury hotel in Edinburgh –  The Balmoral is a luxury 5* hotel
  • Best mid-range hotel in Edinburgh –  Radisson Blu Hotel Edinburgh City Centre
  • Best budget option in Edinburgh –  Elder York Guest House

Scotland’s capital is historically rich and scenically beautiful. The winding cobblestone streets of its Old Town offer quaint medieval charm which is contrasted by the New Town, the very epitome of Georgian style.

There is culture and history around every corner and numerous landmarks, sights, and attractions to explore.

🌟 Highlights of Edinburgh

  • Edinburgh Castle
  • Walk the Royal Mile
  • Shop on Princes Street
  • Enjoy the views from Arthur’s Seat 

Read more – Things to do in Edinburgh

Edinburgh castle.

Day 11 provides a couple of options. You could spend more time exploring Edinburgh OR take a day trip to see more of Scotland’s famous sights, landmarks, and attractions.

☂️ Best day trips from Edinburgh

There are some fantastic day trips you can do from Edinburgh. You could hire a car for the day but we recommend either jumping on the train or taking an organised tour especially if you want to fit as much as possible into your day.

Destinations which can be reached easily by train from Edinburgh in 2 hours or less include:

  • St Andrews (1½ hours)
  • South Queensferry (30 mins)
  • The Kelpies & Helix Park (1 hour)
  • Glasgow (1 hour)
  • Pitlochry (2 hours)
  • Linlithgow Palace (20 mins)
  • Dundee (1 hour 30 mins)
  • Stirling Castle (1 hour)
  • Loch Lomond (1 hour 40 mins)

We recommend the following day tours from Edinburgh:

  • Hogwarts Express and Scottish Highlands Tour – Escape the city for the day and head to the Scottish Highlands. Follow in the footsteps of the world’s most famous wizard, Harry Potter, and jump on board the Hogwarts Express on an unforgettable journey on the Jacobite Steam Train.
  • Loch Ness, Glencoe & the Highlands Tour from Edinburgh – Enjoy a full-day tour and experience some of the most dramatic scenery the Scottish Highlands has to offer. Spend time at mysterious Glencoe and have the chance to enjoy a cruise on Loch Ness and a visit to Urquhart Castle.
  • Loch Lomond, Kelpies, and Stirling Castle Small-Group Tour – Discover the Scottish Highlands on a full-day small-group tour, and see forests, lochs, and stunning mountains. Explore Scotland’s history and learn about its greatest heroes with visits to Stirling Castle, Loch Lomond, and more.
  • Loch Ness, Highlands & Whisky Distillery Tour – Experience the natural beauty of the Scottish Highlands on a full-day coach tour to Loch Ness, Glencoe, and the Trossachs National Park. Go to a working whisky distillery for an optional tasting. Stop for lunch in Fort Augustus and more.

The Kelpies.

Why not combine this best of Britain by rail itinerary with our Scotland rail itinerary?

Scotland Rail Itinerary

We have done the work for you and produced a 21 day + plus complete UK rail itinerary which includes the best of England, Scotland and Wales.

UK rail trip - 14 day itinerary map showing day 12 of 14 - Edinburgh to York.

On Day 12 depart Edinburgh for York. This ancient city is located halfway between Edinburgh and London and its medieval city walls, museums, and shops make this the perfect destination for the last stop on your 14-day tour of Britain.

Journey time is around 2½ hours.

Good to know – Book a seat on the left side of the train (facing direction of travel) for views of the beautiful Northumberland coastline as you journey towards Newcastle and look out for the iconic Angel of the North after departure.

The train passes through Durham and Darlington before arriving in York.

🗺 Logistics Edinburgh – York

  • Edinburgh Waverley to York travel time by train is approximately 2 hour 25 minutes  
  • Depart Edinburgh Waverley arrives York
  • This is a direct train service with London North Eastern Railway (LNER)

🏨 Accommodation in York

  • Best luxury hotel in York – The Grand York is the only 5* hotel in York. Chic, luxury rooms in a grand Edwardian hotel.
  • Best mid-range hotel in York – The Bar Convent is England’s oldest living convent and one of the most unique places to stay in York.
  • Best budget option in York – Wheatlands Lodge offers good value accommodation only 5 minutes walk away from York train station.

🌟 Highlights of York

  • York Minster
  • Walk the Walls
  • The Shambles
  • The Jorvik Viking Centre 

Read more – York Travel Guide

York Minster.

Day 14 is the final leg of this UK train itinerary and will take you from York back to London.

Journey time is a little over 2 hours which means (depending on your flight time) there is the possibility of spending a few more hours exploring London.

🗺 Logistics York – London

  • York to London Kings Cross travel time by train is approximately 2 hours 10 minutes
  • Depart York arrives London King’s Cross
  • This is a direct train service with LNER

FAQs – Travelling the UK by train

If you are considering following this UK rail trip itinerary the easiest and most cost-effective way to travel is to either purchase a BritRail Pass or a Global Eurail Pass . These tickets are only available for overseas visitors so buy them before you arrive.

What are the advantages of purchasing a BritRail Pass?

  • The Britrail M-Pass is an electronic rail pass that can be downloaded directly onto your phone. Also available to print as a PDF copy if you prefer.
  • No need to stress over searching for ticket prices and booking each leg of your journey separately.
  • No need to stick to a rigid timetable as you can travel as much as you like on each day your BritRail Pass is valid.
  • Easier than searching for ticket prices for every leg of the journey.
  • Cheaper than buying individual tickets.
  • Children travel free with most passes. A family of 4 will only pay for 2 adults.
  • No queuing at ticket offices to purchase your ticket – just head to the platform and hop on the train.
  • Airport transfers by rail are included (Heathrow Express, Gatwick Express, and the Stansted Express)

For the itinerary above I recommend purchasing a Britrail GB M-Pass or a Global Eurail Pass as these passes enable unlimited travel across the full length of England, Wales, and Scotland.

I recommend comparing these passes before you buy as you may find one is more cost-effective for your trip.

Click for more information and to purchase BritRail Passes

Click for more information and to purchase a Global Eurail Pass

For this 2 week itinerary, I recommend purchasing a Britrail Pass or a Global Eurail Pass .

If you are planning to take a limited number of train trips purchasing individual tickets may be more cost-effective.

  • 🗓 Purchase prior to travel for the cheapest train tickets .
  • 🚆 Bookings open 12 weeks (84 days) before the date of travel.
  • 🎫 Tickets can be purchased online via thetrainline.com
  • ⚠️ Reservations are compulsory on many services.
  • 😷 Check regulations in regard to Covid-19 prior to travel.

Our complete guide to travelling the UK by train details everything you need to know including how and where to buy tickets, tips for your day of travel and what to expect from your UK train trip.

You can take up to 3 pieces of luggage for free on UK trains including 2 large items such as suitcases or rucksacks.

Store luggage in overhead luggage racks, under the seats, and in the luggage compartments at the end of each carriage.

Are any of the UK’s scenic train routes included in this itinerary?

Some of the most scenic train journeys in the UK are included in this itinerary including the East Coast Mainline from Edinburgh to York.

If you are planning a UK rail trip itinerary for the first time you will find our comprehensive guide to using the UK train network an invaluable resource.

Written by Doug Collins who worked on UK railways for over 25 years it contains practical information, tips, and advice to ensure you make the most of your UK rail adventure.

Read more – Complete guide to travelling the UK by train

  • 13 Tips to save money on rail travel in the UK
  • 9 tips for those planning to travel the UK by rail
  • Guide to the 9 regions of England
  • UK trip planner
  • Guide to English drinks
  • Travel recommendations The world is a big place – not sure where to go? Get recommendations on destinations, the best times to go there, and what to do.
  • Travel in the UK How much have you really travelled within the UK? There are so many local hidden gems waiting to be discovered – be inspired here.
  • The taste of travel For some, the best way to experience a place is through its food. See the best places to go for dining and local dishes around the world.
  • Tips & tricks Hack your way to the most amazing trips ever with tips on everything from how to pack your carry-on to how to eat dumplings.
  • Travel experiences What’s your favourite thing to do when you’re travelling? Find the best things to see and do based on your interests or type of travel.
  • News Read the latest news about the travel industry, our products and services, and what’s happening at KAYAK.

preload

A Greece itinerary for the ultimate summer holiday

uk trip itinerary 10 days

The myths are true — Greek holidays are just magical! The blue Aegean Sea, whitewashed houses, delicious food and wine, and the smell of night-blooming Jasmine await.

I have been to Greece many times and absolutely love the country. After quite a few road trips I am excited to share my favourite Greece itinerary with you. In addition, a 10-day Greece itinerary to see some of the best Greek islands.

In this article

How to get to Greece?

What is the best mode of transport for your greece itinerary, best time for your greece itinerary, average budget for a greece itinerary, greece itinerary 7 days — from central to east macedonia, greece itinerary 10 days — greek highlights tour.

7b89b7f8d5dee571b0c872daf6938459

There are direct flights to various Greek airports from different airports in the UK, including direct flights to Athens from London Stansted, London Luton, and Newcastle. You will pay an average of £210 for a return flight from London to Athens (Data sourced through the KAYAK comparator search tool).

From Athens, you can either take a domestic flight or in some cases a car ferry to many other Greek destinations and islands.

If you are flying to Greece from London or Manchester, you should be able to bag direct flights to Thessaloniki or Crete as well. However, the flight schedule will depend on the season and direct flights are more common in summer.

9513ab2f72e75fa6733e8ca02e86b8b7

Greece is best explored with your own hire car. Except for the big cities and some intercity bus connections, there is very little public transport in many places.

When heading to the Greek islands you can also make use of an extensive ferry network. Many of the ferries also allow cars so you won’t even have to get a new hire car. Some ferries run very frequently on any given day during the summer months, others only have once-a-day departures. Check when putting together your Greece trip itinerary so you can plan accordingly.

Remember that Greece uses the metric system and familiarise yourself with traffic laws when driving in Europe.

Our data shows that summer months are the absolute best in Greece and from June to July temperatures soar up to 28 degrees (data sourced on weatherbase.com ). However, keep in mind that the increased popularity also means more tourists and steeper prices. Especially when the other European countries start their summer holidays, things can get crowded.

A personal tip so you don’t have to repeat my mistakes: when going to Greece during the summer make sure to book a hire car for your road trip with air conditioning!

Shoulder season is in late April and May as well as in autumn from September to early October. Afterward, Greece gets less busy and prices drop as well as temperatures. While great if you are on a budget, touristic infrastructure also becomes limited in places. This means fewer or no ferry connections, fewer open hotels, and reduced hours for sights and restaurants.

b404b5dfd60dd647daf07ae161ff7c9f

Are you ready to book your flights and start your Greek holiday? Before you click ‘book flight’ have a look at the prices I have put together for you. This will give you an idea of how much you need to budget for your Greece itinerary.

  • Average price for a double room in Athens: £118 per night
  • Average price of a bed in a hostel in Athens: £35 per night
  • Average price of a rental car in Athens: £41 per day
  • Price for a litre of fuel in Athens: £1.61*

*As of March 2024, source: numbeo.com

These are average prices based on data collected and can vary between different locations in Greece. For a 10 days in Greece itinerary covering up to 500 miles (ca. 64 litres) with a hire car the total budget will be approximately £859. These are the costs per person based on two people sharing a double hotel room and doesn’t include your international flights.

You will also need to add costs for domestic ferries or flights for some legs of these itineraries. Prices will vary by season, route, and how far in advance you book.

Your Greece itinerary for 7 days officially starts in Thessaloniki. Depending on where in the UK you are flying from, you may be able to fly direct.

Day 1 & 2: Thessaloniki

0abadb74ba003019c4a307065af3d018

Thessaloniki is Athen’s much cooler little sister. While there is plenty of history to explore thanks to a 315 BC founding date, there is also a thriving young art scene. Plenty of students and some of the most innovative restaurants add to the atmosphere.

There are also some amazing beaches not far away. If you want a proper beach holiday, head to Halkidiki, the oceanside weekend destination for the city folk.

Hotel in Thessaloniki: The Modernist is a cool, little city hotel with the best breakfast

Beach promenade

Most visitors will start their Thessaloniki trip on the beach promenade. You will see locals going for a run, fishing, and quite a few tourists as the promenade is home to two of Thessaloniki's most famous sights. First up is the historic White Tower, a building with a gruesome but interesting past. Next are the Umbrellas by Zongolopoulos, an incredibly cool artwork right by the water.

Museum of Photography & Port

Plenty of gritty interesting industrial space awaits at the Port of Thessaloniki. Just follow the promenade and you can’t miss it. It is also home to the Museum of Photography which hosts modern exhibitions.

Don’t forget your camera when you stroll around afterwards, as the port is home to fascinating motifs for your own pictures. Later, the Kitchen Bar is a good place to chill and have a coffee — or enjoy a glass of Greek wine.

Day 3 & 4: Kavala

510ba44def7de96ab56c70c83737674a

Distance from Thessaloniki: 95 mi — less than 2 hours

Once you step into Kavala you feel like you are going back in time. The city’s past is turbulent thanks to Byzantines, Ottomans, and pirates. It was also the home of Muhammad Ali who later became what is considered the founder of modern-day Egypt.

Kavala is also known as the centre of tobacco production in Greece and is an all-around historic gem.

Hotel in Kavala: The Anthemion House, located in the old city close to all the sights

Leave your hire car at Muhammad Ali Square because Panagia, the old city of Kavala, is best explored by foot. Start by visiting the house, now a museum of Muhammad Ali as well as his beautiful Imaret. The old Islamic school is now a very stunning hotel.

After that you can make your way up cobbled roads to the castle. From the top of its tower, you have a panoramic view of Kavala.

Mud Bath of Krinides

Head to Krinides for a special kind of wellness. Mud bathing is great for the skin and joints, and has a long history in this area. First, you will see a doctor who will advise on treatments before you enter a huge pond of mud. You basically float on the mud, a weird and wonderful feeling. If you want you can also book massages on the property.

Expert tip: Make sure to pack an old bathing suit or swim trunks as the mud is very hard to get out of fabrics.

Day 5 & 6: Thassos

d0da19a3acb83e2f22174fa2b8b2e429

Distance from Kavala: 30 mi — 2 hours including car ferry

Thassos is also known as the Emerald Island and an absolute stunner. And that says something considering how many beautiful islands Greece has to offer. Thassos is also known for its bright white marble, which is world-famous and was even used to retile Mecca. There are quarries all around as well as dark green forests, beautiful beaches, and of course some crystal clear water.

Hotel in Thassos: Angelica Hotel, a seaside retreat right by the harbour.

Marble Beach

Marble Beach, also called Paralia Saliara, is made entirely of marble sand and rocks. The sand is almost too bright here and feels like powdered sugar. A good pair of sunglasses is a must!

Getting there is no easy task as you are driving on steep white sandy roads and your hire car will need a wash afterwards. But it is worth it because the bay has a fun beach club and is just oh-so-beautiful.

Island boat trip

A boat trip around the island is a very special experience in Thassos as much of the island’s charm can only be discovered from the water. For example, the ancient ruins of Aliki that are also considered the first marble quarry of Thassos.

Then there is an island inhabited only by goats, an old iron ore factory, and Giola. This is a natural rock pool in the south you can jump into if you dare.

Day 7: Thessaloniki

7e56ed120d53ff1db89d21ccee35f5c6

Distance from Thassos: 140 mi — 4 hours including car ferry

To get back to Thessaloniki you first take the car ferry from Thassos back to Kavala. Make sure to check the departure schedule ahead of time, though the ferry does go quite frequently during the summer season. From the port, you will head to the airport in Thessaloniki where you can drop off your car.

If you didn't fly direct to Thessaloniki from the UK at the start of your Greece travel itinerary, you will need to catch a domestic flight now. If you can’t make all your connections in one day, it might be better to book your international flight for the next day. There is a lovely Sofitel hotel directly in Athens airport where you can spend the night.

This trip takes you to some of the best-known places in Greece. While you can road trip the entire itinerary you will need to budget extra time for some lengthy car ferry rides. An alternative is to book domestic flights from one destination to the next and get a new hire car in each place.

If you have enough time you can also expand this to a Greece itinerary for 14 days. In this case, I recommend you add an extra day for a day trip from Athens and three more days in Crete. This is the largest Greek island — there is so much to do and see, I promise you won’t get bored.

Day 1 & 2: Athens

f52c6270f87e10f77b6567e98c093458

Your Greek holiday starts in Athens, the country’s historic but cool capital. There are archeological sites everywhere, making it one of the most important European cities for those interested in ancient history.

However, Athens is anything but dusty and there are rather hip areas like Psyrri and Exarchia as well as an innovative food scene.

Hotel in Athens: Acro Urban Suites , a simple hotel in the middle of the Plaka

f71407f263b791806e7cd19b3fd4ab10

The Acropolis is the most famous sight in Athens and landmark of the city. The ancient citadel towers over the streets of Athens. It is an absolute must-see even if you are not particularly into history.

It comprises different buildings with the Parthenon being the most significant one. You can go on your own or do a tour — this might be a better option to gain more insight into the history and meaning of the Acropolis.

Expert tip: Go as early in the day as possible, especially if you are travelling during the summer months. It is always crowded here but at least in the morning, you can avoid the worst heat.

Plaka is the old town of Athens and located at the foot of the Acropolis. Its cobblestone streets are steep but incredibly picturesque. There are also cute cafes and restaurants everywhere and it is the perfect place for a glass of wine and to soak up the atmosphere of Athens.

Day 3–6: Crete

fed1b55140c76d069392e6cdd114b71e

Distance from Athens: 250 mi — approximately 11 hours with the car ferry

Crete is Greece’s largest island and yet somehow feels a world away. Cretans are proud of their heritage and proud to be a bit different. Personally, it is my favourite Greek island as there is just something very special about it. A long coastline with stunning beaches, mountain paths, and the most incredible food said to be one of the healthiest cuisines in the world.

Hotel in Chania: Fagotto Art Residences , a cute boutique hotel in a historic building by the Venetian Harbor

Chania’s city centre is historic and cute with buildings and restaurants dotted around the Venetian Harbor. This is a great place for a stroll during sunset. There are plenty of incredible restaurants that show off the best of Cretan cuisine.

In the morning you should head to one of the city beaches. While these are not the best beaches you will find in Crete, they are convenient and offer a glimpse into local life. Usually, you will see many senior citizens gather in the calm waters early in the day to have a chat with their friends.

Botanical Park & Gardens of Grete

The Botanical Park & Gardens are a truly special place especially for plant lovers. Surrounded by mountains and olive groves you can find three different climate zones and their flora here. This includes alpine, tropical, and Mediterranean plants. Walking through the garden is like walking through an enchanted paradise.

They also have an incredible and super local restaurant that only uses produce from Crete — you won’t even get a Coke. Instead opt for Romeiko, a wine made from an indigenous Cretan grapes.

Balos Beach

6f97622cf201a350a94cc886ae2e24d8

It may look like a Caribbean lagoon but Balos Beach is still firmly set in Crete. It is one of the best beaches in Greece and for good reason. The water is shallow, warm, and sparkly turquoise and the sand is white.

To get there, you can book an organised boat trip or go on an adventure. Reaching Balos from land is not easy as it requires a dusty car ride and a hike. Make sure to check with your hire car company that your car is adequately insured.

Day 7–9: Santorini

9d49f6506ca8f0b437c506cb4163d1ac

Distance from Crete: 90 mi — 2 hours with the car ferry

Santorini, also called Thera, is an island known for its wine, over-the-top romantic sunsets, and a lot of glitz and glamour. It is also a mostly submerged caldera with its volcano in the middle, one of the few active ones in Europe. You will probably start your trip in the capital Fira before making your way to Oia. This village is home to houses carved into lava rock and probably the best-known postcard picture of Santorini.

Wine tasting

b8ebc1970f92a0fb036bb96281426f10

While you may think that every Greek island is a wine island (and you wouldn’t be that wrong) Santorini takes the cake. Excavations show that wine-making was already a thing here in prehistoric times.

The lava stone, hot temperatures, and strong winds make for a very special terroir. You will find vineyards and wineries all over the island where you can go for a tasting and to learn more about the Santorini grapes.

Volcano visit

You can visit Santorini’s volcano, which is located on the islet Nea Kameni. You will need to take a boat to get there before you go on land to explore the bizarre volcanic landscape.

From the water, you also have a great view of the caldera that is Santorini with its traditional white houses on top. Should you get cold you may want to take a dip in the volcanic hot springs on the islet Palea Kameni.

Day 10: Athens

Distance from Santorini: 190 mi — 5 hours by car ferry & 1 hour to the airport

From Santorini it is quite a distance to get back to Athens by ferry. Then it is another one-hour drive from the port to the airport. Make sure to add a buffer to your travel time so you won’t have to worry about catching your flight. Alternatively, you can drop off your car hire in Santorini and take a quick domestic flight to Athens.

If you want to explore more, check out our Greece travel guide and have a look at these six amazing Greek islands to extend your holiday.

The hotel recommendations included in this article are based on customer ratings and the author's personal choices, so please feel free to use our hotel search tool to find the accommodation best suited to your needs.

About the author

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Explore more articles

THEME_CREDIT-CARD_PAYMENT_GettyImages-1194920464

  • Somerset Tourism
  • Somerset Hotels
  • Somerset Bed and Breakfast
  • Somerset Vacation Rentals
  • Flights to Somerset
  • Somerset Restaurants
  • Things to Do in Somerset
  • Somerset Travel Forum
  • Somerset Photos
  • Somerset Map
  • All Somerset Hotels
  • Somerset Hotel Deals
  • Things to Do
  • Restaurants
  • Vacation Rentals
  • Travel Stories
  • Rental Cars
  • Add a Place
  • Travel Forum
  • Travelers' Choice
  • Help Center

Somerset or Cotswolds, which to visit - Somerset Forum

  • Europe    
  • United Kingdom (UK)    
  • England    
  • Somerset    

Somerset or Cotswolds, which to visit

  • United States Forums
  • Europe Forums
  • Canada Forums
  • Asia Forums
  • Central America Forums
  • Africa Forums
  • Caribbean Forums
  • Mexico Forums
  • South Pacific Forums
  • South America Forums
  • Middle East Forums
  • Honeymoons and Romance
  • Business Travel
  • Train Travel
  • Traveling With Disabilities
  • Tripadvisor Support
  • Solo Travel
  • Bargain Travel
  • Timeshares / Vacation Rentals
  • England forums
  • Somerset forum

' class=

Hello Everyone,

We are planning a road trip of UK for about 5 weeks in Late August 2024. . We will be driving down from Conwy. Our itinerary allows 3 days in Cotswolds or Somerset. Now here is my problem. I am in a undecided state of mind whether to spend the 3 days in Cotswolds or in Somerset. Some say the Cotswolds are overrated & one should explore the equally picturesque villages of Somerset,hence not very sure which to choose. Some advice & suggestions would be much appreciated regarding where to set up a base if we chooseSomerset & how to make the visit memorable.We are an elderly couple with mobility issues, will be accompanied by our daughter who will be doing the driving. Nothing hectic,want to soak in the essence & beauty of the places we will visit.

16 replies to this topic

' class=

By Somerset, I am assuming you mean the Exmoor area. On that assumption I am familiar with both areas , and IMO Somerset wins hands down. The Exmoor scenery is more dramatic and there is some superb coastal scenery. Lots of thatched cottages. Dunster is a beautiful village with lots of very old buildings and a big National Trust castle. Lynton/ Lynmouth is a beautiful coastal village with a Victorian cliff lift linking the two and amazing coastal views from the top. Lots of other lovely places to explore.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

I'd agree that almost any part of Somerset is at least equal and mostly better than the Cotswolds. But it is a bit further if your starting point is Conwy.

uk trip itinerary 10 days

I've spent 10 years on a weekly basis in both and was in Somerset and North Devon last week for 7 days.

Both are very pretty but I've always said that the Dunster/Porlock/Porlock Weir/Selworthy area on the A39 is as beautiful an area as you would get anywhere in our country.

You have the huge added bonus of crossing over into North Devon and finding places like Malmsmead, Lynton and Lynmouth and the Doone valley..... Somerset wins easily and I love the Cotswolds!

I'm only being honest here but places like Wells, Glastonbury and Bath are well worth visiting but we do not enjoy Weston-super-Mare or Burnham.

I wouldn't go that far. There are lots of beautiful villages and scenery in Shropshire and Herefordshire. Plus the odd castle, garden and stately home to visit. Ludlow is a great little town on a river with a castle.

And for example:

https://www.visitherefordshire.co.uk/see-do/scenic-trails/black-white-villages

Thank you Sandy1949,JohnEW2912,Shane & MartinC for such valuable suggestions. Dunster & Malmsmead seems to be everyone's choice, great, since I would be touring Exmoor area I think I will give Cotswolds a miss. JohnEw2912, as you have rightly pointed out it’s a little too further down to travel at one go from Conwy.What if I do a stop over at Ludlow, which Martin C has highly recommended? Before continuing to Devon?

Shane, how do I incorporate Bath, Wells & Bristol in this schedule?

I plan to visit Dorset for the Jurassic coast.Should I keep Dunster as my base for that?

Thanks again everyone.

This post has been removed at the author's request.

You could visit Bath for a few hours on the day you move from Wales to Somerset?

Well I'm blushing here with the vote for Somerset. 😉

Regarding mobility issues it is very possible to drive easily through the area and stop in some lovely places that are on the level enough for parents to just get out and enjoy.

There are also wildlife and village safaris available where you can be taken by land rover or minibus to see the highlights.

Just be aware that Selworthy is on the side of a hill. Fairly easy to walk to the church and sit down, then to the village green if they are up to it. My friend who struggles is fine with an arm to hold on to.

Tarr Steps has parking for the disabled down by the woodland river and a level short stroll.

30mins to Lynmouth and the sea front is on the level, a ride up the cliff in a hydro cliff railway with amazing views.

I would suggest you ask if you decide on the area giving their interests and we can give places to stop to eat in lovely locations that are on a level. August tends to be busy with children but the families tend to stay in the Minehead area where there's a big beach with all the facilities.

One thing occours to me with regards your parents is diet. Even though it's old English villages there are lots of tea rooms and all do vegetarian and vegan options. If it's more than that then the town of Minehead has 2 Indian restaurants and nearby village of Williton has one. They are all good. Also Malaysian, Thai and Chinese in the area.

Places to stay could be Dunster, Bossington, Allerford, Porlock all on a level. Minehead which is the town has some nice places outside of the town centre that are level. I suggest these because there are some easy drives out to the moors and villages but they are near enough to shops if needed.

Just asking as on your Bristol/Bath/Wells question is there scope to stay in that area after Devon, drop vehicle there and then get the train to London?

Whereabouts in Dorset did you have in mind? Probably helps to know in terms of how to fit that in. If you are talking Lyme Regis end then that seems do-able on a day trip from the areas of Somerset you are talking about. If its the Isle Of Purbeck end (Corfe Castle, Old Harry Rocks, Studland Bay, Durdle Door, Lulworth Cove etc) then not so much.

  • Roman Baths: Advance Ticket Purchase Required for June? 4:58 pm
  • Somerset or Cotswolds, which to visit today
  • Day trip from Bath May 16, 2024
  • Car park in central area of Frome? May 14, 2024
  • Travel from Bath to Cotswolds May 14, 2024
  • Itinerary for week in Bath May 12, 2024
  • Driving from Newbury to Wells which route and short break May 11, 2024
  • 1-week visit: stay *in* Bath or in a village/town nearby? May 11, 2024
  • where to stop for dinner between Stonehenge and Bath May 06, 2024
  • Stonehenge private sunset tour May 05, 2024
  • Rental car in Bath May 05, 2024
  • Clean Air Zone Apr 30, 2024
  • Afternoon tea Apr 30, 2024
  • The Roman Baths discount codes Apr 27, 2024
  • Mulberry Shop - Shipton Mallet 7 replies
  • Honeymoon in Taunton 14 replies
  • where to stay near Taunton 10 replies
  • How to get to Clarke Village? From London or Chipping Camden 13 replies
  • Foot Trails Walking Tour in Somerset/Wiltshire/Dorset areas 2 replies
  • Vineyards / Cider Farms / Campsites 3 replies
  • Good place to stop for lunch near M5 27 replies
  • Afternoon Tea - 90th Birthday 3 replies
  • Beautiful church on a left hand bend!!!! 6 replies
  • Google Maps - are driving times accurate for England? 20 replies

Somerset Hotels and Places to Stay

  • Trip Reports and Ideas-
  • White House
  • Energy/Environment
  • Health Care
  • Transportation
  • Heard on the Hill
  • Fintech Beat
  • Political Theater
  • Donald Trump
  • White House Calendar
  • White House Releases
  • Press Seating Chart
  • Donald Trump Twitter
  • Correspondents Dinner
  • Newsletters
  • Capitol Ink
  • Roll Call e-Edition
  • Classifieds

uk trip itinerary 10 days

Joe Biden - President's Public Schedule

  • Pool Call Time
  • Official Schedule
  • @POTUS_Schedule
  • Pool Report
  • Press Briefing

IMAGES

  1. Vising the UK for just 10 days? We've got great choices for your 10 day

    uk trip itinerary 10 days

  2. 11 Best Road Trips In Great Britain

    uk trip itinerary 10 days

  3. 10 Day UK Trip Itinerary: 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit

    uk trip itinerary 10 days

  4. Three perfect routes for the ultimate 10 day England itinerary

    uk trip itinerary 10 days

  5. A One Week UK Itinerary + Road Trip Map and Tips! Road Trip Map

    uk trip itinerary 10 days

  6. UK Travel Itinerary Planners

    uk trip itinerary 10 days

VIDEO

  1. How to Plan Japan Trip from India l Budget l Itinerary l Tips

  2. Discovering the UK's Most Breathtaking Destinations

  3. Trip Itinerary #10 The Dalmation Coast

  4. Secret Tips The Media Doesn't Want You To Know

  5. Europe Travel Itinerary 10 Days

  6. Kashmir Tour Itinerary l Budget l Srinagar Gulmarg Doodhpathri Sonmarg Pahalgam Tour Information l

COMMENTS

  1. 10 Day England Itinerary: The Best Sights And Attractions In England

    Kynance Cove, Cornwall - one of the most stunning spots on this 10-day England itinerary. Bedruthan Steps, Cornwall. Alternatively, you could focus on Cornwall's food scene. There are lots of great restaurants dotted around the county, but the most famous town for gastronomy is Padstow.

  2. 10 Days in The United Kingdom

    Itinerary #1: Road Trip Around the Highlights of England & Wales. Embark on a 10-day road trip around southern England and Wales as you visit Stonehenge, the Cotswolds, Shakespeare's hometown, the Welsh coast, and more. Uncover the mysteries of Stonehenge. Day. Highlights.

  3. UK Trip Itinerary: Travel Around the UK in 10 Days

    Days 1 & 2: London. No trip to the UK would be complete without a visit to the capital, London. Plus, the chances are very high that this is the city you're going to be flying in to. Although you could easily spend the full ten days of this itinerary wandering around London and still not see it all, we're on a mission to prove that there ...

  4. The Ultimate 10-Day England Itinerary: 3 Perfect Routes

    Three perfect routes for the ultimate 10 day England itinerary including where to stay, things to do and how to get around. ... Though you can easily visit Bristol as a day trip from London, ... Hi I am planning to ciné to the uk Dec/Jan 20 days. My plan so far is London 4 days 29/12-2/1. Then Bath as a base to tour the south.

  5. 10 Days in England Itinerary for First-Timers

    The State Rooms 9:30 am to 7:00 pm (closes at 6:00 pm in September) The Royal Mews 10.00 am to 4.00 pm (closes 5.00 pm March to November) The Queen's Gallery 10.00 am to 5.30 pm (opens 9.30 am in the summer) You might be interested in: - Changing of the Guard & Buckingham Palace Tour.

  6. Ultimate 10 Day UK Itinerary for 2024

    Flight time: 1 hour and 20 minutes. On day 5 it is time to travel to England and visit London, the most famous and biggest city in the UK. This will be the longest travel day in the itinerary, but at least you can sit back and relax rather than having to drive yourself. There is little difference time-wise between taking the train or a flight.

  7. A 10 Day UK Trip Itinerary by Public Transport

    A 10 day UK itinerary by bus or train. This itinerary for the UK focuses on what is achievable for a visitor to the UK who wants to travel using public transport. It covers many of the most popular sights and attractions in the UK, has a route map, plus tips and advice on planning the perfect trip to the UK.

  8. An Epic 10 Day UK Itinerary for England and Wales

    This Wales and England 10 day itinerary also assumes that you will either leave in the evening of day 10 or the following day. Day 1: London. Day 2: London. Day 3: Stonehenge to Tenby to Pembrokeshire. Day 4: Pembrokeshire, hike, Day 5: hike Drive to Dolgellau. Day 6: Hike Cadair Idris.

  9. Best UK Itinerary 10 Days (England

    Day 1: Arrival in London (UK Itinerary 10 Days) Buy London Pass with access to 85+ attractions. Arrive at one of London's airports (Heathrow, Gatwick, or City Airport). Take a taxi, train, or bus to The Blackbird hotel in Greater London. Spend the day exploring the city's iconic landmarks, such as the Tower of London, Buckingham Palace, and ...

  10. 10 Days In England: The Ultimate Itinerary

    The London Eye ( book your tickets here) Thames river boat tour. The Tower of London. Tower Bridge. HMS Belfast. The Shard. St Paul's Cathedral. Make sure you grab a London Passs for your 10 days in England. Top tip: By far the cheapest way to see London's top attractions is by buying a London Pass.

  11. The best itineraries for exploring England

    The wild side of England - a 10-day itinerary. This trip is a tour through the best of England's natural landscapes, the inspiration for generations of poets, writers and composers. ... are exquisite. Outside, the recreated villa gardens are the oldest in the UK. Go from Fishbourne to Bath: Take the train from Fishbourne to Bath (3hrs).

  12. Perfect 10 Days in England Itinerary to see it all

    Day 3 of England Itinerary 10 days: Experience the best museums in Central London. Day 4 of England Itinerary 10 days: London off-the-beaten-track attractions. Day 5 of 10 days in England itinerary: Go on a day trip to Windsor. Day 6 to 8 of 10 days in England itinerary: Live the fairytale life in the Cotswolds. Day 6 - Cirencester.

  13. 10 Day UK Trip Itinerary: 5 Beautiful Itineraries For Your Visit

    Day 7 of this 10 day UK trip itinerary features a drive back to Glasgow, where you can return the hire car. The city is famed for its Victorian and Art Nouveau architecture, and is home to a lot of Scotland's cultural institutions. At whatever point you wish, catch the train to Edinburgh (taking around an hour) and spend the last part of your ...

  14. 10 days in United Kingdom UK Itinerary

    United Kingdom Itinerary 10 days | At a glance. Here is a snapshot of what you will be exploring in 10 days. Day 1 - 3: London and Windsor. Day 4: Wales day trip. Day 5 - 6: Cotswolds. Day 7: Edinburgh. Day 8 - 10: Scottish Highlands and Beyond. Getting to the United Kingdom.

  15. UK Itinerary

    Discover the perfect UK itinerary! 10 days in London, York, and Edinburgh will give you a taste of bustling city life, medieval charm, hilltop castles, and more! This England/Scotland itinerary is one of my favorites. Learn how to map out your time, travel between cities, and suggestions for longer or shorter itineraries. #unitedkingdom #england #scotland #travel

  16. UK trip planner (How to plan your UK Trip

    If you have 10 to 14 days (or longer) for a road trip or train trip it is possible to include many of the popular destinations throughout England, Scotland and Wales in your itinerary. ... This is my suggested timeline for planning and booking your UK travel itinerary. 6 - 12 months in advance . Plan your itinerary; Book International flights;

  17. Great Britain Itinerary

    Rick's Best Three-Week Trip to Britain. The recommended itineraries below give you an idea of how much you can reasonably see in 21 days, but of course you'll want to adapt them to fit your own interests and time frame. ... Day 10: Explore Lake District on foot and/or by bus and boat (sleep in Keswick) Day 11: To Oban, Scotland, by scenic 5 ...

  18. UK Road Trip Itinerary Planner

    This UK road trip planner aims to help you pin down the ideal 1 week, 10 day or 2 week UK road trip itinerary to follow during your visit. Featured in this guide are 7 of the best road trip routes in the UK. Whether you want a 10 days in England itinerary, would rather spend a week in Wales or have 10 days to discover Scotland, this post ...

  19. 10 days in London and Scotland: a full itinerary

    This travel plan will allow time to get to know London and see the sights before whisking you off to the Highlands of Scotland and you'll also be able to add in the Isle of Skye and Edinburgh too! All in 10 days. Read on for this UK itinerary including London and Scotland and get the low down of what you can do! A note from the writer: Hey!

  20. 2 Weeks in the UK

    This UK road trip itinerary has you starting in London, and using a rental car as the transportation method. It covers some of our highlights in the UK, including cities, castles, and stunning natural scenery. ... It certainly would be possible 🙂 I've actually written a 10 day UK itinerary by public transport. Whilst the route isn't ...

  21. A One Week UK Itinerary + Road Trip Map and Tips!

    Day 6: Northumberland. Day 7: Edinburgh. As mentioned at the start of the post, this itinerary is quite busy. If you have limited vacation time, then you can definitely do a lot in a short time and see the highlights, but be aware you will not be able to explore every location in great depth.

  22. Planning a First Trip to the UK with Kids and Teens: Our 10 Day Itinerary

    Day 9: Bakewell. Old House Museum. Bakewell Treasure Trail. Dinner at The Woodyard. Day 10: Bakewell. walk to Chatsworth House (bus back) Try Bakewell Pudding. Day 11: Bakewell to Dublin! Okay, so now for the ambitious part where I get into how we put the itinerary together and planned the trip in general. Deciding where to go

  23. See the best of Britain by train (2 week itinerary

    Table Of Contents. See Britain by train with our 14 day itinerary. Days 1 - 3 London. Day 4 London - Bath. Day 5 Bath (Day trip - Cotswolds or Stonehenge) Day 6 Bath - Cardiff. Day 7 Cardiff - Liverpool or Lake District. Day 8 - Liverpool or Lake District. Day 9 Liverpool or Lake District to Edinburgh.

  24. Greece itinerary for the ultimate summer road trip

    Greece itinerary 10 days — Greek highlights tour. This trip takes you to some of the best-known places in Greece. While you can road trip the entire itinerary you will need to budget extra time for some lengthy car ferry rides. An alternative is to book domestic flights from one destination to the next and get a new hire car in each place.

  25. Somerset or Cotswolds, which to visit

    We are planning a road trip of UK for about 5 weeks in Late August 2024. . We will be driving down from Conwy. Our itinerary allows 3 days in Cotswolds or Somerset. Now here is my problem. I am in a undecided state of mind whether to spend the 3 days in Cotswolds or in Somerset.

  26. Roll Call Factba.se

    The President delivers the keynote address at the U.S. Holocaust Memorial Museum's Annual Days of Remembrance ceremony in Washington, D.C. Full Text and Analysis U.S. Capitol In-Town Travel Pool